Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
71 views276 pages

Cda 3000

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 276

EN

F1
EN

FR

ES

CDA3000
Application Manual

Inverter drive system


to 90 kW

Adaptation of the drive system


to the application
Overview of documentation

CDA3000 Catalogue

Before purchase

Selecting and ordering a


drive system

CDA3000 Operation Operating Instructions


Application Manual
Manual KEYPAD KP200

With shipment D E F1
(depending on supply
pakkage)
Quick and easy initial Operation via Adaptation of the drive
commissioning KEYPAD KP200 system to the application

CANLust Communication CANopen Communication PROFIBUS-DP Communi-


Module Manual Module Manual cation Module Manual

G1 G2 G3

Project planning, Project planning, Project planning,


installation and installation and installation and
commissioning of the commissioning of the commissioning of the
CDA3000 on the field bus CDA3000 on the field bus CDA3000 on the field bus

Application Manual CDA3000


F1
ID no.: 0840.22B.0-00
Date: January 2000

We reserve the right to make technical changes.


Dear User,
This manual is aimed primarily at you as a programmer of drive and
automation solutions. It describes how you can adapt your new CDA3000
drive system optimally to your specific application. We assume that your
drive is already running – if not, you should first consult the Operation
Manual.
Don't be put off by the size of the manual: Only sections 1 to 3 contain
essential information with which you need to familiarize yourself. The
remaining sections and the appendix are provided as reference
resources: They demonstrate the full scope of functions and flexibility of
the CDA3000's software package in solving a wide variety of drive tasks.
In those sections you can concentrate on the functions relevant to your
own application, such as power failure bridging or DC braking.
Good luck, and have a nice day!

How to use
this manual 1
1 Safety

2 Inverter module CDA3000 2

3 User interface and data structure 3

4 Preset solutions 4

5 Functions and parameters 5

6 Control modes 6

Appendix: Parameter overview, Error table, Glossary


Index A

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 FR
Pictograms
➢ Attention! Misoperation may result in damage to the
drive or malfunctions.

➢ Danger from electrical tension! Improper behaviour


may endanger human life.

➢ Danger from rotating parts! The drive may start run-


ning automatically.

➢ Note: Useful information.


Table of contents

1 Safety
1.1 Measures for your safety ........................................1-1
1.2 Intended use ...........................................................1-2
1.3 Responsibility .........................................................1-2

2 Inverter module CDA3000


2.1 Device and terminal view .......................................2-2
2.2 Module mounting ....................................................2-4
2.3 Ambient conditions .................................................2-5
2.4 Specification of control terminals ..........................2-6
2.5 LEDs .......................................................................2-11
2.6 Isolation concept ...................................................2-12
2.7 Reset ......................................................................2-14
2.8 Loading device software .......................................2-16

3 User interface and data structure


3.1 Data structure .........................................................3-2
3.1.1 Application data sets ............................................3-4
3.1.2 User data sets ......................................................3-5
3.1.3 Characteristic data sets .......................................3-6
3.2 User levels in the parameter structure ..................3-7
3.3 Operation with KEYPAD KP200 .................................3-9
3.4 Operation with DRIVEMANAGER ..............................3-12
3.5 Commissioning ......................................................3-13

4 Preset solutions
4.1 Activating a preset ..................................................4-2
4.2 Selection of preset ..................................................4-3 DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 FR
4.3 Traction and lifting drive .......................................4-7
4.3.1 DRV_1 ................................................................. 4-9
4.3.2 DRV_2 ............................................................... 4-11
4.3.3 DRV_3 ............................................................... 4-14
4.3.4 DRV_4 ............................................................... 4-17
4.3.5 DRV_5 ............................................................... 4-20
4.3.6 Comparison of parameters, traction and lifting drive .
4-23
4.4 Rotational drive .....................................................4-26
4.4.1 ROT_1 ............................................................... 4-28
4.4.2 ROT_2 ............................................................... 4-30
4.4.3 ROT_3 ............................................................... 4-32
4.4.4 Comparison of parameters, rotational drives ...... 4-35
4.5 Field bus operation ...............................................4-37
4.5.1 BUS_1 ............................................................... 4-39
4.5.2 BUS_2 ............................................................... 4-40
4.5.3 BUS_3 ............................................................... 4-42
4.5.4 Comparison of parameters, field bus operation .. 4-44
4.6 Master/Slave operation ........................................ 4-46
4.6.1 M-S_1 ............................................................... 4-50
4.6.2 M-S_2 ............................................................... 4-52
4.6.3 M-S_3 ............................................................... 4-54
4.6.4 M-S_4 ............................................................... 4-56
4.6.5 Comparison of parameters,
Master/Slave operation ...................................... 4-58

5 Software functions
5.1 _15FC-First commissioning ................................... 5-4
5.2 Inputs and outputs ................................................5-10
5.2.1 _18IA-Analog inputs .......................................... 5-10
5.2.2 _200A-Analog output ........................................ 5-14
5.2.3 _21ID-Digital inputs ......................................... 5-17
5.2.4 _24OD-Digital outputs ....................................... 5-21
5.2.5 _25CK-Clock input/Clock output ........................ 5-24
5.2.6 _28RS-Reference structure ............................... 5-26
5.2.7 _26CL-Control location ...................................... 5-34

Application Manual CDA3000


5.3 Protection and information ...................................5-37
5.3.1 _30OL-Frequency limitation ...............................5-37
5.3.2 _33MO-Motor protection ...................................5-39
5.3.3 Device protection ...............................................5-45
5.3.4 _34PF-Power failure bridging ............................5-47
5.3.5 _36KP-KEYPAD ...................................................5-51
5.3.6 _38TX-Device capacity utilization ......................5-53
5.3.7 _39DD-Device data ...........................................5-55
5.3.8 _VAL-Actual values ............................................5-56
5.3.9 _50WA-Warning messages ................................5-59
5.3.10 _51ER-Error messages ......................................5-62
5.4 Bus operation and option modules ......................5-65
5.4.1 _55LB-LUSTBUS ..................................................5-65
5.4.2 _57OP-Option modules ......................................5-67
5.5 Open-loop and closed-loop control ......................5-69
5.5.1 _31MB-Motor holding brake ..............................5-69
5.5.2 _32MP-MOP function ........................................5-71
5.5.3 _59DP-Driving profile generator .........................5-74
5.5.4 _27FF-Fixed frequencies ...................................5-78
5.5.5 _60TB-Driving sets ............................................5-79
5.5.6 _65CS-Characteristic data set (CDS) ..................5-82
5.5.7 _66MS-Master/Slave operation ..........................5-84
5.5.8 _67BR-DC braking .............................................5-87
5.5.9 _68HO-DC holding-on ........................................5-90
5.5.10 _80CC-Current controller ...................................5-91
5.5.11 _64CA-Current-controlled startup ......................5-93
5.5.12 _69PM-Modulation ............................................5-98
5.5.13 _84MD-Motor data ..........................................5-101

6 Control modes
6.1 Voltage Frequency Control (VFC) ............................6-4
6.1.1 _70VF-Voltage Frequency Control ........................6-7
6.1.2 _74IR-IxR load compensation ............................6-12
6.1.3 _75SL-Slip compensation ..................................6-14
6.1.4 _76CI-Current injection ......................................6-16
6.1.5 _77MP-Magnetization ........................................6-18
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 FR
6.2 Sensorless Flux Control (SFC) .............................. 6-20
6.2.1 _78SS-Speed controller SFC ............................. 6-25
6.2.2 _80CC-Current controller .................................. 6-27
6.2.3 Tips and optimization aids for control engineers 6-28
6.3 Field-Oriented Regulation (FOR) ..........................6-38
6.3.1 _79EN-Encoder evaluation ................................ 6-41
6.3.2 _81SC-Speed controller FOR ............................. 6-43
6.3.3 _80CC-Current controller ................................... 6-45

A Overview of parameters

B Error messages

C Index

Application Manual CDA3000


1

1 Safety 2
1.1 Measures for The CDA3000 inverter drives are quick and safe to handle. For your own
your safety safety and for the safe functioning of your device, please be sure to
observe the following points: 3
Read the Operation Manual first!
• Follow the safety instructions!
4
Electric drives are dangerous:
• Electrical voltages > 230 V/460 V: Dangerously high
voltages may still be present 10 minutes after the power is 5
cut, so always make sure the system is no longer live!
• Rotating parts
• Hot surfaces
Your qualification:
6
• In order to prevent personal injury and damage to pro-
perty, only personnel with electrical engineering qualifica-
tions may work on the device. 7
• The qualified personnel must familiarize themselves with
the Operation Manual (refer to IEC364, DIN VDE0100).
• Knowledge of national accident prevention regulations
(e.g. VBG 4 in Germany, regulations laid down by the
A
employers' liability insurance associations) is essential.
During installation observe the following instructions:
• Always comply with the connection conditions and
technical specifications.
• Comply with the standards for electrical installations,
such as regarding wire cross-section, grounding lead and
ground connections.
• Do not touch electronic components and contacts
(electrostatic discharge may destroy components).

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 1-1 FR
1 Safety

1.2 Intended use Inverter drives are components that are intended for installation in electri-
cal systems or machines. The inverter may not be commissioned (i.e. it
may not be put to its intended use) until it has been established that the
machine as a unit complies with the provisions of the EC Machinery
Directive (89/392/EEC). EN 60204 (Safety of machines) must be
observed.

The CDA3000 conforms to the Low Voltage Directive


(73/23/EEC).
EMC The following generic standards are complied with in applica-
tion of the installation instructions:
• EN 50081-1 and EN 50081-2 (line-borne and radiated
interference emission)
• IEC 1000-4-2 to 5 / EN61000-4-2 to 5 (Interference
immunity of the inverter module)

If the frequency inverter is used for special applications (e.g. in areas


subject to explosion hazard), the required standards and regulations
(e.g. EN 50014, “General provisions” and EN 50018 “Flameproof enclo-
sure”) must always be observed.
Repairs may only be carried out by authorized repair workshops.
Unauthorized opening and incorrect intervention could lead to physical
injury or material damage. The warranty provided by LUST would thereby
be rendered void.

1.3 Responsibility Electronic devices are fundamentally not fail-safe. The company setting
up and/or operating the machine or plant is itself responsible for ensuring
that the drive is rendered safe if the device fails.
EN 60204-1/DIN VDE 0113 “Safety of machines”, in the section on “Elec-
trical equipment of machines”, stipulates safety requirements for electrical
controls. The requirements are intended to protect the safety of personnel
and machines and to maintain the function capability of the machine or
plant, and must be observed.
The function of an emergency off system does not necessarily have to cut
the power supply to the drive. To protect against danger, it may be more
beneficial to maintain individual drives in operation or to initiate specific
safety sequences. Execution of the emergency off measure is assessed
by means of a risk analysis of the machine or plant, including the electri-
cal equipment to EN 1050, and is determined with selection of the circuit
category in accordance with prEN 954 “Safety of machines – Safety-rela-
ted parts of controls”.

1-2
1

2
2 Inverter module CDA3000
3
2.1 Device and terminal view .......................................2-2
2.2 Module mounting ....................................................2-4 4
2.3 Ambient conditions .................................................2-5
2.4 Specification of control terminals ..........................2-6
2.5 LEDs .......................................................................2-11 5
2.6 Isolation concept ...................................................2-12
2.7 Reset ......................................................................2-14 6
2.8 Loading device software .......................................2-16

7
This section sets out basic aspects of the device hardware which are
essential to understanding and using the Application Manual. For more
information on the device hardware refer to the CDA3000 Operation
Manual. A

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 2-1
2 Inverter module CDA3000

2.1 Device and


terminal view
CANopen/CANLust PROFIBUS-DP

S1
X13 X13 S2

X10 X10
1 1
H1 H2 H3 2 2

(1)
X11

X4

X7 X12 X11

(2)
20
X2
X1 X1 19
U U 18
17
V V 16
15 X15
W W 14
1
13
2
12
11
10 21
9 22
L+ L+ 8 23
7 24
RB RB 6 25
5 26
4
X6 27
L- L-
3 28
2 29
1 30
L3
X3 31
N L2 32
33
L1 L1 34
35

CDA32.xxx CDA34.xxx UM-8I4O

Fig. 2.1 Layout, CDA3000

No. Designation Function


H1, H2, H3 LEDs Device status display
Mains, motor, braking resistor (L+/RB),
X1 Power terminal
DC supply
4 digital inputs
3 digital outputs (of which 1 relay)
X2 Control terminal
2 analog inputs
1 analog output
PTC, Klixon evaluation or linear temperature
X3 PTC terminal
transmitter
Table 2.1 Key to Fig. 2.1

Application Manual CDA3000 2-2


2 Inverter module CDA3000

No. Designation Function


X4 RS232 terminal for DRIVEMANAGER or KEYPAD KP200
1
X6 Option slot 1 e.g. for user module UM8I4O
X7 Option slot 2 e.g. for communication module
Voltage supply
X10
for communication module
+ 24 V, ground 2
X11 CAN-In / PROFIBUS-DP Bus connection input
X12 CAN-Out CAN bus connection output
X13 Address coding plug Only for CANopen, Profibus DP 3
Voltage supply,
X15 User module UM-8I4O 8 digital inputs,
4 digital outputs
(1) Reset button See section 2.7 4
(2) Boot button See section 2.7
S1, S2 Address coding switch Only for CANopen, Profibus DP
Table 2.1 Key to Fig. 2.1 5

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 2-3
2 Inverter module CDA3000

2.2 Module Inverter modules up to size BG5 are side mounted. To remove them,
mounting press the red release lever on the front and withdraw the module to the
side.
As from size BG6 the modules are built-in. This additionally requires
mounting package MP-xxxx for each module (see Order Catalogue).
The modules are interconnected with the aid of the mounting package
from X6 → X6 and X7 → X7.

Inverter module BG1 ... BG5 Inverter module BG6 ... BG8

VAL

Hz

stop start
return enter

H1 H2 H3

X4

ANT
D-3RIEBST
H1
563 ECH
3 Lah NIK H2
nau H3

Typ:
X4
Netz
:
Ausg

X7
.:

SN
.: ECHN
IK

000. IEBST au
ANTR Lahn
633
000. D-35

0000
0000

Typ:

k!
1

X2 Netz:

klic
2

:
Ausg.

SN.: .000000
000.0
00
00
X6

X1
U

W X6 ECHN
IEBST au
IK

X3 ANTR Lahn
D-35
633

RB
+ Typ:
!
1
Kondensatorent- capacitor disscharge temps de decharge

RB Netz:
2
Betriebsanleitung Pay attention to the >3 min. observer le
du condensteur

3
ATTENTION

:
Ausg.
operation manual! mode dèmploi!

L-
4
5

00
X7
6

SN.: .000000
7

00
L1 000.0
8
ladezeit >3 Min. time >3 minutes.

9
WARNING

10

L2
11

L3
12
13
14
ACHTUNG

15
beachten!

16
17
18
19
20

L1 L2 L3 L+ L- RB U V W

X6 = option slot 1 for The CDA3000 inverter modules have two option
user modules (UM-xxxx) slots to accommodate user and communication
X7 = option slot 2 for modules.
communication modules (CM-xxxx).

Figure 2.2 Mounting of user/communication modules

Attention: Do not plug modules in during operation.

Application Manual CDA3000 2-4


2 Inverter module CDA3000

2.3 Ambient User and


conditions Feature Inverter module
communication module
1
-10 ... 45 ° C (BG1 ... BG5)
0 ... 40 ° C (BG6 ... BG8)
in operation -10 ... 55 °C
Tempera- with power reduction
ture range to 55 ° C
2
in storage -25 ... +55 °C
in transit -25 ... +70 °C
Relative air humidity 15 ... 85 %, condensation not permitted
3
in stationary Vibration: 0.075 mm in frequency range 10 ... 58 Hz
Mechanical operation Shock: 9.8 m/s2 in frequency range >58 ... 500 Hz
strength to
Vibration: 3.5 mm in frequency range 5 ... 9 Hz
IEC 68-2-6 in transit
Shock: 9.8 m/s2 in frequency range >9 ... 500 Hz
4
Device menu IP20 (NEMA 1)
Cold plate IP20
Protection Cooling
Push-through heat sink IP54 5
(3 ...15 kW) Convection IP20
method
Push-through heat sink IP20
(22 ... 37 kW)
Touch protection VBG 4 6
See section 5.5.12 “Modula-
Power reduction None
tion”

Mounting
Up to 1000 m above MSL, above 1000 m above MSL
with power reduction of 1% per 100 m, max. 2000 m
7
height
above MSL

Table 2.2 Ambient conditions of the modules


A

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 2-5
2 Inverter module CDA3000

2.4 Specification Inverter module CDA3000


of control
terminals Des. Terminal Specification floating
Analog inputs
ISA00 X2-2 • UIN = +10 V DC, ±10 V DC
IIN = (0) 4-20 mA DC, software-switchable to:
• 24 V digital input, PLC-compatible (IEC1131) U: ±1% mea-
• Switching level Low/High: <4.8 V / >8 V DC sured value
• Resolution 10-bit I: ±1% mea-
• RIN=110kΩ sured value
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
• Floating against digital ground
ISA01 X2-3 • UIN = +10 V DC, software-switchable to:
• 24 V digital input, PLC-compatible (IEC1131)
• Switching level Low/High: <4.8 V / >8 V DC
U: ±1% mea-
• Resolution 10-bit
sured value
• RIN=110 kΩ
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
• Floating against digital ground
Analog output
OSA00 X2-5 • PWM with carrier frequency 19.8 kHz
• fLimit = 1.1 kHz
• ROUT=100 Ω
• Uout=+10 V DC

• Imax=5 mA
• Short-circuit proof
• Internal signal delay ≈ 1ms
• Tolerance ± 2.5 %
Digital inputs
ISD00 X2-9 • Limit frequency 5 kHz
• PLC-compatible (IEC1131)
• Switching level Low/High: <5 V / >12 V DC
• Imax at 24 V = 10 mA ✔
• RIN = 3 kW
• Internal signal delay ≈ 100 µs
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
1) Applicable to limited degree

Table 2.3 Specification of control terminals

Application Manual CDA3000 2-6


2 Inverter module CDA3000

Des. Terminal Specification floating


ISD01 X2-10 •

Limit frequency 500 kHz
PLC-compatible (IEC1131)
1
• Switching level Low/High: <5 V / >12 V DC
• Imax at 24 V = 10 mA

• RIN = 3 kW
• Internal signal delay ≈ 2 µs
2
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
• Data input with reference coupling (Master/Slave)
ISD02 X2-11 •

Limit frequency 500 kHz
PLC-compatible (IEC1131)
3
• Switching level Low/High: <5 V / >12 V DC
• Imax at 24 V = 10 mA
• RIN = 3 kW 4
• Internal signal delay ≈ 2 µs ✔
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
• A-input with square encoder evaluation for 24V HTL
encoder against GND_EXT
• Permissible pulse counts 32...16384 pulses per
5
rev. (2n with n = 5...14)
ISD03 X2-12 • Limit frequency 500 kHz
• PLC-compatible (IEC1131) 6
• Switching level Low/High: <5 V / >12 V DC
• Imax at 24 V = 10 mA
• RIN = 3 kW
• Internal signal delay ≈ 2 µs ✔ 7
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
• B-input with square encoder evaluation for 24V HTL
encoder against GND_EXT
• Permissible pulse counts 32...16384 pulses per A
rev. (2n with n = 5...14)
ENPO X2-8 • Power stage enable = High level
• Switching level Low/High: <5 V / >12 V DC
• Imax at 24 V = 10 mA
• RIN = 3 kW ✔
• Internal signal delay ≈ 20 µs
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
• PLC-compatible (IEC1131)
1) Applicable to limited degree
Table 2.3 Specification of control terminals

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 2-7
2 Inverter module CDA3000

Des. Terminal Specification floating


Digital outputs
OSD00 X2-15 • Short-circuit proof
• PLC-compatible (IEC1131)
• Imax = 50 mA
• Internal signal delay ≈ 250 µs ✔
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
• Protection against inductive load
• High-side driver
OSD01 X2-16 • Short-circuit proof with 24V supply from inverter
module
• PLC-compatible (IEC1131)
• Imax 50mA
• Internal signal delay ≈ 2 µs
✔ 1)
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
• No internal freewheeling diode; provide external
protection
• High-side driver
• Data output with reference coupling
Relay output
OSD02 X2-18 • Relay 48 V / 1 A AC, changeover contact
X2-19 • Usage category AC1 ✔
X2-20 • Operating delay approx. 10 ms
Motor temperature monitor
PTC1/2 X3-1 • Measured voltage max. 12 V DC
X3-2 • Measuring range 100 Ω - 15 kΩ
• suitable for PTC to DIN 44082

• suitable for temperature sensor KTY84, yellow
• suitable for thermo self switch (Klixon)
• Sampling time 5 ms
Voltage supply
+10.5V X2-1 • Auxiliary voltage UR =10.5 V DC
• Short-circuit proof –
• Imax = 5 mA
+24V X2-6 • Auxiliary voltage UV = 24 V DC
X2-7 • Short-circuit proof
X2-13 • Imax = 200 mA (overall, also includes the driver ✔
currents for outputs OSDox)
• No polarity reversal protection
Analog ground
AGND X2-4 • Isolated from DGND
Digital ground
1) Applicable to limited degree
Table 2.3 Specification of control terminals

Application Manual CDA3000 2-8


2 Inverter module CDA3000

Des. Terminal Specification floating


DGND X2-14
X2-17
• Isolated from AGND
1
1) Applicable to limited degree
Table 2.3 Specification of control terminals
2
Note: The sampling time of the inputs and outputs is 1 ms. The digital
voltages relate to the digital ground and the analog voltages to the
analog ground. 3

Pinout of the serial interface X4 4


Pin No. Function

1 +15 V DC for KEYPAD KP200


2 TxD, Transmit data 5
3 RxD, Receive data
4 NC, free contact
5 GND for +15 V DC of the KEYPAD KP200 6
6 +24 V DC, supply voltage for control board
7 NC, free contact
8 NC, free contact 7
9 GND for +24 V SDC, supply voltage for control board

Tabelle 2.4 Spezification of interface pins


A

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 2-9
2 Inverter module CDA3000

User module UM-8I4O

Des. Terminal Specification floating


Digital input
+24V DC X15-21 Supply voltage for IEDxx
IED00 to X15-22 • Limit frequency 5 kHz
IED07 to • PLC-compatible (IEC1131)
X15-29 • Switching level Low/High: >5 V / >15 V DC
• Imax at 24 V = 6 mA ✔
• RIN = 4 kΩ
• Internal signal delay ≈ 2 µs
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
DGND X15-30 • Digital ground for IEDxx
OED00 X15-32 • Short-circuit proof, Ikmax = 1.2 A/OEDxx
to to • PLC-compatible (IEC1131)
OED03 X15-35 • Current at “1”: Imin = 5 mA
Imax = 500 mA
• Imax in parallel operation = 125 mA ✔
• Internal signal delay ≈ 250 µs
• Sampling cycle 1 ms
• Protection against inductive load
• Thermal overload protection
• High-side driver
DGND X15-31 • Digital ground for OEDxx
Supply voltage, module feed
+24V DC X15-1 • UV = 24 V DC +20%
• I = 0.6 A
• No protection against false polarity
DGND X15-2 • Digital ground
Table 2.5 Specification of control terminals UM-8I4O

Application Manual CDA3000 2-10


2 Inverter module CDA3000

2.5 LEDs At the top right of the inverter module there are three status LEDs colored
red (H1), yellow (H2) and green (H3).
1
Device status Red LED (H1) Yellow LED (H2) Green LED (H3)
Supply voltage 24 V DC for
control unit applied
(24 V DC internal or external)
● 2
Ready (ENPO set) ❍ ● ●
In service/Auto-tuning active ❍ ✳ ●
3
Warning ● ● /✳ ●
Error ✳ (flash code) ❍ ●
❍ LED off, ● LED on, ✳ LED flashing 4
Table 2.6 Meanings of LEDs

Note: The parameter-setting mode by control unit is not indicated 5


separately.

6
Flash code of KEYPAD
Error cause
red LED H1 Display
1x E-CPU CPU errors and other rare errors 7
2x E-OFF Undervoltage shut-off
3x E-OC Current overload shut-off
4x
5x
E-OV
E-OLM
Voltage overload shut-off
Motor overloaded
A
6x E-OLI Device overloaded
7x E-OTM Motor temperature too high
8x E-OTI Cooling temperature too high
Table 2.7 Error messages

Error messages can be viewed in more detail using the KEYPAD KP200
control unit or the DRIVEMANAGER (see page A-13).

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 2-11
2 Inverter module CDA3000

2.6 Isolation The analog and digital grounds are isolated from each other in order to
concept avoid transient currents and interference over the connected lines. The
analog ground is connected directly to the inverter module processor. It
serves as the reference potential for analog reference input. The digital
inputs and outputs are isolated from it. Disturbance variables are thereby
kept away from the processor and the analog signal processing function.
To enhance operating safety we recommend that the analog and digital
grounds should not be interconnected.

RB

M
3~

SNT
+ 10 V + 24 V

I/O I/O
analog digital

Fig. 2.3 Voltage supply to I/Os

When selecting the cable, note that the cables for the analog inputs and
outputs must always be shielded. The cable or wire core shield on
shielded pairs should cover as large an area as possible in respect of
EMC considerations. In this way high-frequency interference voltages are
safely discharged (Skin effect).

Special case: Use of the analog inputs as digital inputs


Use of the internal 24 V DC as supply voltage when utilizing the analog
inputs with the “digital input” function requires connection of an analog
and digital ground. For the reasons mentioned above, this can lead to
interference, and demands extra care in selecting and connecting the
control cables.

Application Manual CDA3000 2-12


2 Inverter module CDA3000

X2 Function
1 Reference voltage 10V, 10mA 1
2 ISA00, as dig. input
3 ISA01, as dig. input
4 Analog ground 2
5 OSA00
A bridge is only required
when the internal 24 V is 6 Auxiliary voltage 24 V,
used. 7 max. 200 mA
3
13 Auxiliary voltage 24 V
14 Digital ground
15 4
16
17 Digital ground

Fig. 2.4 Removal of isolation when using the analog inputs with the digital
5
function

If more digital inputs and outputs are required, we recommend using user 6
module UM-8I4O. This ensures safe operation of the CDA3000 inverter
module without interfering with the processor or the digital signal process-
ing.
7

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 2-13
2 Inverter module CDA3000

2.7 Reset Device reset


The inverter module can be reset by way of the Reset button. This
initiates a system initialization and causes the processor to be reset.
Parameter which have only been changed in the RAM, i.e. have not been
saved by parameter 150-SAVE from the subject area _15FC First Com-
missioning, are reset to their original (last saved) value.

H1 H2 H3

(1)

CDA3000

X4

Fig. 2.5 Reset button (1)

Parameter reset
In PARA menu of KEYPAD: Press the two cursor keys to reset the para-
meter currently being edited to the factory defaults (152-ASTER =
DRV_1).
In DRIVEMANAGER : In the edit window of the parameter editor choose the
“Default” button.

Factory setting of a data set


Setting parameter 4-PROG = 1 from the subject area _86SY System
resets the active data set in the RAM to its factory default.

Note: Attention! The factory setting causes application data set 1 (trac-
tion and lifting drive, DRV_1) to be loaded. Pay attention to the ter-
minal assignment and the functionality of the inverter module in
this operation mode.

Finally, the factory setting in the RAM should be saved in a user data set
by way of parameter 164-UMWR from the subject area _15FC First Com-
missioning. Caution: Saving the factory setting with 150-SAVE = START
causes user data set 1 to be overwritten, because it is preset in the fac-
tory setting.

Application Manual CDA3000 2-14


2 Inverter module CDA3000

Factory setting of all user data sets


(complete device in delivery condition)
• DRIVEMANAGER: Setting parameter 4-PROG = 850 from the subject 1
area _86SY System fully resets the factory defaults of the device.
This includes all user data sets. During this process communication
with the DRIVEMANAGER is cut. Reconnect.
• KEYPAD: You can achieve the same effect by simultaneously press- 2
ing the two cursor keys on the KEYPAD KP200 while the inverter
module is powering up. The KEYPAD displays “RESET”.
The reset takes approx. 30 seconds to restore the factory defaults of all 3
user data sets. Then the device is ready to start again. User data set 1 is
in the active data set (RAM).

4
Note: Attention! The factory setting causes application data set 1 (trac-
tion and lifting drive, DRV_1) to be loaded. Pay attention to the ter-
minal assignment and the functionality of the inverter module in 5
this operation mode.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 2-15
2 Inverter module CDA3000

2.8 Loading device Loading new device software


software With the DRIVEMANAGER a new device software release (firmware) can be
loaded into the Flash-EPROM of the CDA3000. In this way the software
can be updated without opening up the inverter module.
This can be done where the device software is already present without
pressing the Bootstrap key.
To do so, connect the DRIVEMANAGER to the inverter module and from the
Tools menu select “Load device software (firmware) ...”. The DRIVEMANA-
GER then guides you through the further work steps.

Device software damaged (Bootstrap)


If there is no software in the inverter module, or if the connection was cut
while a software release was being transferred, the following procedure is
required:
1. The required firmware (Hex file “Vxxx_xx.hex”) must be present.
2. Start the firmware transfer.
3. Select the device type.
4. When a message appears the device must be switched to Bootstrap
mode.

Bootstrap mode in CDA3000: With the Boot


H1 H2 H3
key (2) pressed down, tap the Reset button (1)
briefly once. LEDs H1, H2, H3 go out. (1)

CDA3000

X4

(2)

5. The device responds with “Software transferred successfully”.


6. A new connection is set up. Message: “Waiting for readiness” from
0...100 %.
7. A message reminds you that you need to exit Bootstrap mode
(relates only to series MC7000).
The CDA3000 automatically cancels Bootstrap mode.

Application Manual CDA3000 2-16


1

2
3 User interface and data structure
3
3.1 Data structure .........................................................3-2
3.1.1 Application data sets ............................................3-4
3.1.2 User data sets ......................................................3-5
4
3.1.3 Characteristic data sets .......................................3-6
3.2 User levels in the parameter structure ..................3-7
5
3.3 Operation with KEYPAD KP200 .................................3-9
3.4 Operation with DRIVEMANAGER ..............................3-12
3.5 Commissioning ......................................................3-13 6

The user interface and data structure of the CDA3000 is highly flexible, as
a result of various user control variants and wide-ranging parameter- 7
setting facilities. In this way an ordered data structure provides assistance
in data handling and in setting the parameters of the CDA3000 inverter
module.
A
A special subject area containing the key parameters for safe operation of
the drive provides assistance for quick and easy initial commissioning.
The parameters of the inverter module can be set using the simple
KEYPAD KP200 control unit or the user-friendly DRIVEMANAGER PC user
software.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 3-1
3 User interface and data structure

3.1 Data structure For parameter setting, individual parameters, parameter groups in subject
areas or complete, predefined parameter data sets can be selected.
These preset parameter data sets are termed application data sets
(ADS). If the application data sets are modified by adaptations for the
customer, the results are user data sets (UDS). Parameters can only be
set in the active data set.

Application data sets User data sets


(ADS) (UDS)

Traction and Rotational User data User data


lifting drive drive set 1 set 2
(DRV_1) (ROT_1)

001 MODE 001 MODE


WE WE

999 xyz 999 xyz

Bus Master/Slave User data User data


operation operation set 3 set 4
(BUS_1) (M-S_1)
001 MODE 001 MODE
WE WE
999 xyz 999 xyz

ROM ROM

Save with
150-SAVE
164-UDSWR
Active
data set

Traction and
lifting drive
Load with 165-UDSAC
Load with 152-ASTER
001 MODE

Fahr- und 999 xyz Customer parameter setting


lifting drive

Common RAM
parameters VAL

Hz

D RIV E-
Charac- Charac- M AN AG ER
stop start
return enter

teristic teristic
CDS1 CDS2

Fig. 3.1 Data structure of the CDA3000


FS = factory setting; Parameters from the subject area _15FC
First Commissioning

Application Manual CDA3000 3-2


3 User interface and data structure

Note: Any change of parameters is made only in the RAM, ad at the end
must be saved to the ROM by means of parameter 150-SAVE 1
from the subject area _15FC First Commissioning.

Parameters
2
The parameters are changeable variables which are all assigned a prede-
fined factory setting (FS). They have a fixed value range with a minimum
and maximum value. The current parameter value is always displayed. 3

Subject areas
For ease of handling the parameters are bundled into parameter groups.
4
The parameter groups are termed “subject areas”, and contain the soft-
ware functions of the CDA3000 inverter module.
5
Initial commissioning

Magnetizing
Motor data
Commissioning Modulation
Current-controlled startup
6
Current controller
Error messages DC holding
Warning messages DC braking

Control location
Reference structure
Actual values
Device data
Master/Slave operation
Characteristic switchover
7
Clock input/output Device capacity utilization Driving sets
Digital outputs KP 200 Fixed frequencies
Digital inputs Power failure bridging Driving profile generator
Analog output
Analog inputs
Motor protection
Frequency limitation
Option modules
LUSTBUS
MOP function
Motor holding brake
A

Inputs/ outputs Protection and Information SIO and options Open-loop and closed-loop control functions

Motor data
Speed controller FOR
Current controller
Current injection
Encoder evaluation
Slip compensation
Speed controller SFC
I x R load compensation
VFC

Sensorless Flux Control


VFC Field Oriented Regulation

Fig. 3.2 Subject areas for function-oriented operation of the inverter


module

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 3-3
3 User interface and data structure

3.1.1 Application data Application data sets (ADS) are preset, complete parameter data sets
sets which are provided to handle a wide variety of application-typical move-
ment tasks.
Loading an application data set into the RAM automatically configures the
inverter module (see Fig. 3.1). All subject areas, including the signal pro-
cessing inputs and outputs, are preset to the chosen solution.
Using an application data set makes commissioning of the inverter
module much quicker and easier. By changing individual parameters, the
application data sets can be adapted to the needs of the specific task.
These modified application data sets are stored in the device as user data
sets. In this way you can arrive more rapidly at your desired movement
solution.
A total of 15 application data sets cover the typical areas of application of
the CDA3000 inverter module.

Application data sets and typical applications:

➢ “Traction and lifting Conveyor belt, rack, trolley, spindle and


drive”: lifting gear drives
➢ “Rotational drive”: Spindle, extruder and Winding drives or
centrifuges
➢ “Bus operation”: Integration of the inverter system in
a network via CANLust, CANopen or
Profibus-DP
➢ “Master/Slave Reference coupling of several inverter
operation”: modules

Note: The factory setting (FS) is application data set 1 of the “traction
and lifting drive” category. It is automatically loaded and activated
the first time the unit is started. After every subsequent start the
selected user data set is loaded.

Application Manual CDA3000 3-4


3 User interface and data structure

3.1.2 User data sets When the application data set has been adapted to the respective appli-
cation, the resultant new data set must be saved as a custom setting in
the user data set. It is not possible to store the data in a factory pre-
defined application data set (see Fig. 3.1).
1
Four user data sets (UDS) can be managed in the inverter module, with
one user data set containing two subordinate characteristic data sets
(CDS). 2
The user data sets managed by the inverter can be selected and activa-
ted via the KEYPAD or DRIVEMANAGER, by bus access or via terminals.
Online switching (drive started) between the user data sets is not pos-
sible.
3
For a user data set switchover the “ENPO” signal can remain set but the
power stage of the inverter module must be inactive, i.e. no start signal
must be applied. 4

Example of switchover via terminals:


5
Terminal Terminal
User data set
1 2

User
data set 1
6
0 0 001 MODE

999 xyz
7
User
data set 2

1 0 001 MODE

999 xyz
A
User
data set 3

0 1 001 MODE

999 xyz

User
data set 4

1 1 001 MODE

999 xyz

Table 3.1 Example of selection of user data sets via terminals

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 3-5
3 User interface and data structure

3.1.3 Characteristic Each user data set and the application data sets may contain a second
data sets characteristic data set. The switch can be made to this second characte-
ristic data set
• by terminals
• when a frequency limit is reached
• when the direction is reversed or
• by bus access.
Online switching between characteristic data sets CDS1 and CDS2 is
possible.

The following subject areas contain parameters for the second characteri-
stic data set:

➢ Reference structure: Min., max. and fixed frequency

➢ Driving profile generator: Ramps

➢ Current-controlled startup: All parameters

➢ Voltage frequency control: All parameters

➢ IxR load compensation: All parameters

➢ Slip compensation: All parameters

➢ Current injection: All parameters

➢ Magnetizing: All parameters

➢ Speed controller SFC: All parameters

➢ Speed controller FOR All parameters

➢ Analog inputs

Application Manual CDA3000 3-6


3 User interface and data structure

3.2 User levels in By means of the parameters the inverter module can be fully adapted to
the parameter the application task. In addition there are parameters for the internal
structure variables of the inverter module which, for the sake of general operating 1
safety, are protected against user access.
The user levels are set by way of parameter 01-MODE from the subject
area _36KP KP200. The number of editable and displayable parameters
changes depending on the user level. The higher the user level the grea- 2
ter the number of accessible parameters. In contrast, users are presented
with a more concise range of those parameters which are really required,
allowing them to find their specific solution more rapidly. Consequently,
choosing as low a user level as possible makes operation significantly 3
easier.

Note: The user levels protect against unauthorized access. Conse- 4


quently, to protect the parameter setting of the inverter module
parameter 01-MODE from the subject area _36KP KP200 should
always be reset to the lowest user level after adaptation.
5

Whether a parameter can be only viewed, or viewed and edited, on the


current user level is indicated by symbols. 6
in DRIVEMANAGER in KEYPAD Description

-S- Parameter display only (shown) 7


-E- Parameter editable (edit)
-E- (flashing) Parameter being edited (edit)

Table 3.2 Indication of whether a parameter is editable


A

Error ATT1
If a user attempts to edit a display-only parameter in the KEYPAD, access
is denied and a warning message ATT1 is displayed. The warning mes-
sage can be reset by pressing the Start/Enter key.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 3-7
3 User interface and data structure

Changing user level


If a higher user level is selected by way of parameter 01-MODE, a prompt
for the associated password is automatically delivered. The password can
be changed by way of a password parameter in subject area _36KP (set-
ting “000” = password disabled).

User level Password Password in


Target group Comments
01-MODE parameter FS
No access permission, for status monitoring only
Layman • No parameter setting 1
• Display of basic parameters
With basic knowledge for minimal operation
Beginner • Expanded basic parameters editable 2 362-PSW2 000
• Expanded parameter display
For commissioning and field bus connection
Advanced • Parameter setting for standard applications 3 363-PSW3 000
• Expanded parameter display
With control engineering skills
Expert • All control parameters editable 4 364-PSW4 000
• Expanded parameter display
Other For system integrators 5 365-PSW5 -
Specialist
For operation and commissioning by KEYPAD KP 200 CTRL menu 367-PSWCT 000
personnel

Table 3.3 User levels

Changing the password for a user level


A password can only be changed for the authorized levels – passwords to
a higher user level cannot be viewed or changed. The password is
changed by selecting the parameter, editing it and then saving it by pres-
sing the Enter key on the KEYPAD KP 200. It can also be changed by way
of the DRIVEMANAGER.

Note: Please make a note of any change of password and keep your
passwords safe from third parties.

Application Manual CDA3000 3-8


3 User interface and data structure

,y,,,,,
yyyyy
,,
yy
3.3 Operation with Mounting and connection of the KEYPAD
KEYPAD KP200
1

y,y,,,,
yyyyy
,,
KP200 KP200
X4

,,
yy
stop
return
start

3m
2
enter

max
.
b)

Fig. 3.3
a)

y,,,,,,
yyyyy
,,
yy
Mounting the KEYPAD: a) on the CDA3000 inverter module
(connector X4) or b) on the switch cabinet door
3

Controls and displays


5
Chipcard (SMARTCARD) to back-up and
(1)
transfer settings

3-digit display, e.g. for parameter


6
(1) (2)
number
CARD
SM A R T

(3) Current menu

5-digit display for parameter name and


7
(2) (4)
value
(5)
(3) VAL
(5) Acceleration or braking ramp active
(4) Hz
A
(6)
stop
return
start
enter (6) Bar graph display, 10-digit

start
Call up menu branches or parameters; save changes;
enter
start in “Control drive” mode

stop
return Quit menu branches; cancel changes; stop in “Control drive” mode

Select menu, subject area or parameter; increase setting

Select menu, subject area or parameter; reduce setting

Fig. 3.4 Controls and displays on the KEYPAD KP200

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 3-9
3 User interface and data structure

Menu structure
The KEYPAD KP200 has a menu structure which provides for user-friendly
operation and is identical to the menu structure of the KP100 for the
SMARTDRIVE VF1000 inverters and the MASTERCONTROL servocontrollers.

VAL PARA CTRL CARD

Actual values Subject area Drive SMARTCARD


• Select • Select • Control • Read
• Display Parameter • Write
• Select • Write
Capacity indicator • Change protection
Initial
commissioning

Fig. 3.5 Functions of the menus

On the menu level (“MENU” display) you can use the cursor keys to
switch between menus. Press the Start/Enter key to open a menu and
the Stop/Return key to quit the menu.

VAL PARA CTRL CARD

start start start start


enter enter enter enter
stop stop stop stop
return return return return

Fig. 3.6 Navigation at menu level

Application Manual CDA3000 3-10


3 User interface and data structure

VAL PARA CTRL CARD

VAL PARA CTRL CARD


1
A
start
enter
stop
start
enter
stop
start
enter
start
enter 2
return return

VAL PARA CTRL CARD

B %VA
min-1
hmin
Hz/s

3
stop start start start
return enter enter enter

stop stop stop stop


return return return return

0...9

C
VAL PARA CTRL CARD
4
start start start
enter enter enter

stop
return
stop
return
start
enter stop
return
0...9
stop
return
5
VAL PARA CTRL CARD

D %VA

start
enter
6
MP

A Select VAL menu


(display actual values)
Select PARA menu
(parameter setting)
Select CTRL menu
(control drive via KEYPAD)
Select CARD menu
(load/save with SMARTCARD)
7
B Display continuous actual Select subject area Drive stopped READ = load from SMARTCARD
value, use cursor key to (where appropriate pass- WRITE = save to SC
switch to ... word prompt with display LOCK = + write protection A
PASSW, factory setting = no UNLOCK = - write protection
password)

C Next actual value Select parameter Enter reference Select parameter area, start
with Start/Enter key

D Display actual value Display parameter value and Start drive with Start/Enter, Function terminated without
change as necessary use cursor key to change error
reference value (MP = MOP
function)

Table 3.4 Menu structure of the KEYPAD KP200 at a glance

For more information on operation with the KEYPAD refer to the KEYPAD
KP200 operating instructions.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 3-11
3 User interface and data structure

3.4 Operation with Connection and startup


DRIVEMANAGER • Connect the interface cable and switch on the power supply to the
drive unit.
• When the program starts the DRIVEMANAGER automatically sets up a
connection to the connected drive unit (at least V2.3).
• If the connection setup does not occur automatically, check the set-
tings in the Tools > Options menu and start the connection setup
with the icon.
X4

yy
,,
H1 H2 H3

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
D-35633 Lahnau X4

Typ: 3m m
Netz:
Ausg.: RS232 ax.
SN.:
RS232
000.000.00000000

X1
U
X2
D RIV E
V

W
M AN AG ER
!
Betriebsanleitung Pay attention to the >3 min. observer le
Kondensatorent- capacitor disscharge temps de decharge
du condensteur

operation manual! mode dèmploi!


ATTENTION

RB+

RB
ladezeit >3 Min. time >3 minutes.

L-
WARNING

L1
X3
beachten!
ACHTUNG

L2

L3

Fig. 3.7 Connection via RS232 interface cable (9-pin, plug-and-socket)

The key functions

Icon Function Menu

Edit parameters Active device > Change settings

Print parameter data


Active device > Print settings
set

Active device > Control > Basic


Control drive
operation modes

Active device > Monitor > Quickly


Digital scope
changing digital scope values

Table 3.5 Functions of the DRIVEMANAGER

For more information refer to the DRIVEMANAGER Help.

Application Manual CDA3000 3-12


3 User interface and data structure

3.5 Commissioning Procedure for commissioning with the aid of the Application
Manual

1. Initial commissioning based on Operation Manual:


1
The precondition is initial commissioning with
the aid of the Operation Manual.
The quick route The user manual only covers adaptation of the 2
to a drive solution software functions.

If the settings from the initial commissioning based on the Opera-


tion Manual are not adequate for your application:
3

2. Selection of the optimum application data set


The application data sets record the typical
4
applications of the CDA3000 inverter module.
Refer to the application data
sets overview table 5
(See section 4.2).
The application data set which best covers the
specific application is selected.
6
3. Custom adaptation of the application data set
to the application
The application data sets serve as the starting
7
point for application-oriented adaptation.
Additional functional adjustments are made to
the parameters in the function-oriented subject
areas (see Figure 3.2 in section 3.1).
A
Save your settings by means of parameter
150-SAVE = START.

4. Checking the set application solution


To preserve the safety of personnel and
machinery, the application solution should only
be checked at low speed. Make sure the direc-
tion of rotation is correct. In case of emergency
the inverter power stage can be disabled, and
the drive stopped, by removing the ENPO
signal.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 3-13
3 User interface and data structure

5. Concluding commissioning
When you have successfully completed com-
missioning, save your settings (using the
SMARTCARD or DRIVEMANAGER) and store the
data set in the device.

Application Manual CDA3000 3-14


4 Preset solutions

4 Preset solutions
1

4.1 Activating a preset ..................................................4-2


2
4.2 Selection of preset ..................................................4-3
4.3 Traction and lifting drive .......................................4-7
4.3.1 DRV_1 .................................................................4-9 3
4.3.2 DRV_2 ...............................................................4-11
4.3.3 DRV_3 ...............................................................4-14
4.3.4 DRV_4 ...............................................................4-17 4
4.3.5 DRV_5 ...............................................................4-20
4.3.6 Comparison of parameters, traction and lifting drive .
4-23
5
4.4 Rotational drive .....................................................4-26
4.4.1 ROT_1 ...............................................................4-28
4.4.2 ROT_2 ...............................................................4-30
4.4.3 ROT_3 ...............................................................4-32
6
4.4.4 Comparison of parameters, rotational drives ......4-35
4.5 Field bus operation ...............................................4-37 7
4.5.1 BUS_1 ...............................................................4-39
4.5.2 BUS_2 ...............................................................4-40
4.5.3 BUS_3 ...............................................................4-42
4.5.4 Comparison of parameters, field bus operation ..4-44
A
4.6 Master/Slave operation ........................................4-46
4.6.1 M-S_1 ...............................................................4-50
4.6.2 M-S_2 ...............................................................4-52
4.6.3 M-S_3 ...............................................................4-54
4.6.4 M-S_4 ...............................................................4-56
4.6.5 Comparison of parameters,
Master/Slave operation ......................................4-58

The inverter module contains preset solutions for the most frequent appli-
cations (so-called “application data sets”). The object of these presets is
to find the optimum device setup for the application with minimal parame-
ter setting.
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-1
4 Preset solutions

Based on the application-specific basic settings for the “traction and lifting
drive” and “rotational drive” categories, all software functions relevant
here are already optimized to those applications.
With additional basic settings the inverter module can be very easily be
preset for field bus operation or for network operation with several inverter
modules (Master/Slave operation).
Within these four presets, the inverter module offers users the possibility
of selecting various control terminal settings. In this way the inputs and
outputs of the inverter module are adapted to the signals required in the
process.
With the total of 15 available presets the inverter module can be adapted
with a small number of parameters to virtually any application, thereby
greatly reducing commissioning times.

4.1 Activating a By means of assistance parameter 152-ASTER a preset application data


preset set is activated in the inverter module. This means that the presets for the
application in question are loaded.
Parameter 151-ASTPR always retains the original device preset as its
display value when an application data set is edited.

15 Application data sets


Best possible
152-ASTER 151-ASTPR presetting

DRV_1
DRV_2
DRV_3 5 x traction and
lifting drive
DRV_4
Requirements of DRV_5
the application

ROT_1
ROT_2 3 x rotational
drive
ROT_3

BUS_1
3 x field bus
BUS_2
operation
BUS_3

M-S_1
M-S_2 4 x Master/Slave
M-S_3 operation
M-S_4

Fig. 4.1 Activating a preset with assistance parameter 152-ASTER from


the subject area _15FC First Commissioning

Application Manual CDA3000 4-2


4 Preset solutions

4.2 Selection of Application data set: traction and lifting drive


preset (activated by 152-ASTER = DRV_x)
1
DRIVE DRV_1 • Quick jog/slow jog driving
profile
• Process messages
2
DRV_2 • Quick jog/slow jog driving
Conveyor belt profile
m2 • Characteristic data set
switchover 3
• User data set switchover
• Process messages

Rack drive
DRV_3 • Quick jog/slow jog driving
profile
4
m2 • User data set switchover
Traction and lifting drive

• Limit switch evaluation


• Process messages 5
DRV_4 • Time-optimized driving profile
Spindle drive (fixed frequency)
m2 • User data set switchover 6
• Encoder evaluation
• Process messages
7
DRV_5 • Time-optimized driving profile
Trolley drive
• Table sets for fixed
frequencies
m2
• User data set switchover A
• Encoder evaluation
• Limit switch evaluation
• Process and warning
Lifting drive messages

Table 4.1 Application: Traction and lifting drive

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-3
4 Preset solutions

Application data set: rotational drive


(activated by 152-ASTER = ROT_x)

ROTATION ROT_1 • Analog speed input

yy
@@
€€
ÀÀ
,,
• Speed adjustment via button
(MOP function)
• Process messages

@@
€€
ÀÀ
,,
yy
Extruder

ROT_2 • Analog speed input


(0-10 V)
• Analog speed correction
Rotational drive

Spindle drive (0-10 V)


• Encoder evaluation
• Process message

Stirrer
ROT_3 • Analog speed input
• Analog speed correction
• Table sets for fixed
frequencies
Winding drive • User data set switchover
• Encoder evaluation
• Process and warning
messages

Table 4.2 Application: Rotational drive

Application Manual CDA3000 4-4


4 Preset solutions

Application data set: field bus operation


(activated by 152-ASTER = BUS_x)
1
FIELD-BUS BUS_1 • Pure field bus operation

Field bus
CANLust BUS_2
• Field bus operation
• Select Manual mode
2
CANopen
Profibus DP - Quick jog driving profile
- Analog speed input
• Process messages 3
Field bus operation

SPS

CDA 4
BUS_3 • Field bus operation
CDA • Limit switch evaluation
• Select Manual mode
5
- Quick jog driving profile
- Analog speed input
CDA
• Process messages
6

Table 4.3 Application: Field bus operation 7

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-5
4 Preset solutions

Application data set: Master/Slave operation


(activated by 152-ASTER = M-S_x)

MASTER-SLAVE M-S_1 • Master


• Digital guide value input
• Adaptation of guide value via
button (MOP function)
• Analog speed input
• Process messages
Master/Slave M-S_2 • Master
• Digital guide value input
Master/Slave operation

• Analog speed input


CDA3000
Master • Encoder evaluation
• Process messages
CDA3000
Slave M-S_3 • Slave
• Digital guide value recording
• Adaptation of guide value via
CDA3000
Slave button (MOP function)
• Process messages

CDA3000
Slave M-S_4 • Slave
• Digital guide value recording
• Encoder evaluation
• Process messages

Table 4.4 Application: Master/Slave operation

Application Manual CDA3000 4-6


4 Preset solutions

4.3 Traction and Loading one of the application data sets DRV_1 to DRV_5 into the RAM
lifting drive by setting parameter 152-ASTER from the subject area _15FC First Com-
missioning causes the inverter module automatically to adopt the presets 1
of the software functions as well as of all inputs and outputs for the “trac-
tion and lifting drive” application.

Active functions in the preset


2
152-ASTER =
Function 3

DRV_1
DRV_2
DRV_3
DRV_4
DRV_5
v
4
Quick jog driving profile ✔✔✔✔✔
t
5
v
Quick jog/slow jog
driving profile
✔✔✔ ✔ 6
t

7
v
Table sets with fixed
frequencies and ramps

t
A

v
Characteristic data
switchover for load ✔
adjustment
t

1 2
User data set
001 MODE 001 MODE
switchover
✔✔✔✔
999 xyz 999 xyz

Table 4.5 Traction and lifting drive presets

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-7
4 Preset solutions

152-ASTER =
Function

DRV_1
DRV_2
DRV_3
DRV_4
DRV_5
Limit switch evaluation ✔ ✔

M Motor brake actuation ✔✔✔✔✔


3~

Encoder evaluation
M (necessary for control ✔✔
3~ mode FOR)

Messages:
• Ready to start ✔✔✔✔✔
• Speed reached

Warnings:
• Inverter module
overloaded
• 80% of IN
reached ✔
• Motor overloaded
• Inverter ambient
temperature too
high

Table 4.5 Traction and lifting drive presets

Aster Brief description Page reference

DRV_1 "Quick jog/slow jog driving profile" Page 4-9


DRV_2 "Quick jog/slow jog driving profile with switchover" Page 4-11
"Quick jog/slow jog driving profile with limit switch evalua-
DRV_3 Page 4-14
tion"
DRV_4 "Clock drive with fixed frequency and encoder evaluation" Page 4-17
"Clock drive with fixed frequencies, encoder and limit
DRV_5 Page 4-20
switch evaluation"

Table 4.6 Brief description

Application Manual CDA3000 4-8


4 Preset solutions

4.3.1 DRV_1 Quick jog/slow jog driving profile


Preset 1 for traction and lifting drives
1
Function Application

• Clock drive with time-optimized • Conveyor belt


quick jog driving profile or
• Quick jog/slow jog driving profile
• Trolley drive 2
• Rack drive
• Spindle drive
• etc.
3
SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function
>1 k
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message 4
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground
~ H1 16 OSD01 “Reference reached” message 5
- K1 15 OSD00 Output for motor holding brake
14 DGND Digital ground
M 13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V 6
3~
12 ISD03 not assigned
S1 11 ISD02 Selection of slow jog
STL 10 ISD01 Start/Stop quick jog counter-clockwise 7
STR 9 ISD00 Start/Stop quick jog clockwise
ENPO 8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV A
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
6 UV
0 ... 10 V
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
4 AGND Analog ground
-
3 ISA01 not assigned
2 ISA00 not assigned
1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.2 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = DRV_1

Note: Comparison of parameters for DRV_x see Page 4-23.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-9
4 Preset solutions

Input signals
303-FMAX1
270-FFIX1
590-ACCR1 592-DECR1
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0

594-STPR1 - 303-FMAX1

1
STR 0

1
STL 0

1
S1 0

(1) 1
0

t [ms]
(1) DC braking torque, subject area _68HO
Fig. 4.3 Example of a quick jog/slow jog driving profile for two directions of
rotation (ASTER = DRV_1)

Output signals

f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0

1
H1 0

1
K1 0

t [ms]
H1 Speed reached
K1 Motor holding brake
Fig. 4.4 Output signals dependent on driving profile
(ASTER = DRV_1 to DRV_5)

Application Manual CDA3000 4-10


4 Preset solutions

4.3.2 DRV_2 Quick jog/slow jog driving profile with switchover


Preset 2 for traction and lifting drives
1
Function Application

• Clock drive with time-optimized • Conveyor belt


quick jog driving profile or
• Quick jog/slow jog driving profile
• Trolley drive 2
• Rack drive
• Application switchover • Spindle drive
• Switchover of setting when load • Lifting drive
changed • etc. 3

SPS/PLC
>1 k
X2 Des. Function 4
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break) 5
17 DGND Digital ground
~ H1 16 OSD01 “Reference reached” message
- K1 15 OSD00 Output for motor holding brake 6
14 DGND Digital ground
M 13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
3~
S4 12 ISD03 Characteristic data set switchover 7
S3 11 ISD02 Selection of slow jog
STL 10 ISD01 Start/Stop quick jog counter-clockwise
STR 9 ISD00 Start/Stop quick jog clockwise A
ENPO 8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
6 UV
0 ... 10 V
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
4 AGND Analog ground
-
S2 3 ISA01
User data set switchover
S1 2 ISA00

1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.5 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = DRV_2

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-11
4 Preset solutions

Note: Comparison of parameters for DRV_x see Page 4-23.

Input signals
303-FMAX1
270-FFIX1
590-ACCR1 592-DECR1
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0

594-STPR1 - 303-FMAX1

1
STR 0

1
STL 0

1
S1 0

(1) 1
0

t [ms]

(1) DC braking torque, subject area _68HO


Fig. 4.6 Example of use of the control terminal default
with ASTER = DRV_2

The output signals are shown in Fig. 4.4.

Application Manual CDA3000 4-12


4 Preset solutions

User data set switchover (switchable offline)

S1 S2 Active UDS Example


1
0 0 UDS 1 for application 1 x-axis, traction drive
1 0 UDS 2 for application 2 y-axis, traction drive
0 1 UDS 3 for application 3 z-axis, lifting drive 2
1 1 UDS 4 for application 4 Sorting belt

Table 4.7 User data set switchover


3
Note: Please set parameter 166-UDSSL from PARAM (= DRIVEMANA-
GER, KEYPAD) to TERM (= terminals) and save changes (See sec-
tion 5.1) after setting of User data sets.
4

Characteristic data set switchover (switchable online)


5
S4 Active characteristic data set Example

0 Characteristic data set 1 Lifting drive with load 6


1 Characteristic data set 2 Lifting drive without load

Table 4.8 Characteristic data set switchover


7

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-13
4 Preset solutions

4.3.3 DRV_3 Quick jog/slow jog driving profile with limit switch evaluation
Preset 3 for traction and lifting drives

Function Application

• Clock drive with time-optimized • Rack drive


quick jog driving profile or • Spindle drive
• Quick jog/slow jog driving profile • Trolley drive
• Application switchover • Lifting drive
• Evaluation of safety limit switches • etc.

SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function


>1 k
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground
~ H1 16 OSD01 “Reference reached” message
- K1 15 OSD00 Output for motor holding brake
14 DGND Digital ground
M 13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
3~
S4 12 ISD03 Limit switch left
S3 11 ISD02 Limit switch right
STL 10 ISD01 Start/Stop quick jog counter-clockwise
STR 9 ISD00 Start/Stop quick jog clockwise
ENPO 8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
6 UV
0 ... 10 V
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
4 AGND Analog ground
-
S2 3 ISA01 Selection of slow jog
S1 2 ISA00 User data set switchover

1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.7 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = DRV_3

Application Manual CDA3000 4-14


4 Preset solutions

Note: Comparison of parameters for DRV_x see Page 4-23.


1
Input signals
303-FMAX1
270-FFIX1
2
590-ACCR1 592-DECR1
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0
3
594-STPR1 - 303-FMAX1

1
STR 0
4
1
STL 0

1
S1 0
5
(1) 1
0

t [ms]
(1) DC braking torque, subject area _68HO 6
Fig. 4.8 Example of use of the control terminal default with ASTER=3

7
The output signals are shown in Fig. 4.4.

User data set switchover (switchable offline) A


S1 Active UDS Example

0 UDS 1 for application 1 x-axis, traction drive


1 UDS 2 for application 2 z-axis, lifting drive

Table 4.9 User data set switchover

Note: Please set parameter 166-UDSSL from PARAM (= DRIVEMANA-


GER, KEYPAD) to TERM (= terminals) and save changes (See sec-
tion 5.1) after setting of User data sets.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-15
4 Preset solutions

Limit switch evaluation


S4
S3

Fig. 4.9 Example of a limit switch evaluation

303-FMAX1

f [Hz] 592-DECR1 590-ACCR1

- 303-FMAX1

1
STR 0

STL 1
0

1
S3 0

S4 1
0

t [ms]

Fig. 4.10 Limit switch evaluation of S4 and S3

Example: Limit switch right resets Start Clockwise. Resetting of Start


Clockwise is not evaluated. The Start Counter-clockwise com-
mand can be used to move out of the limit switch zone.

Note: It is not allowed to move behind limit switches, please use mecha-
nical protective measures to avoid this. The evaluation of limit
switches depends on static signals, not on signal edges.

Application Manual CDA3000 4-16


4 Preset solutions

4.3.4 DRV_4 Clock drive with fixed frequency and encoder evaluation
Preset 4 for traction and lifting drives
1
Function Application

• Clock drive with time-optimized • Conveyor belt


driving profile
• Switchover for application
• Rack drive 2
• Spindle drive
• Encoder evaluation • Trolley drive
• Lifting drive
• etc. 3
SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function
+24V
>1 k
+24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make) 4
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground 5
~ H1
16 OSD01 “Reference reached” message
- K1 15 OSD00 Output for motor holding brake

N2
14 DGND Digital ground 6
M 13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
3~
(1) B 12 ISD03 Encoder track B
A
11 ISD02 Encoder track A 7
STL
10 ISD01 Start/Stop counter-clockwise
STR
9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO
8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable A
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
0 ... 10 V
6 UV
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX

- 4 AGND Analog ground


S2
3 ISA01
S1
User data set switchover
2 ISA00

1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

(1) The encoder is evaluated only in control mode FOR.


Fig. 4.11 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = 4

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-17
4 Preset solutions

Encoder A HTL encoder (see Fig. 4.12) can be connected to terminals X2:11 and
12.

Fig. 4.12 Block diagram, HTL output circuit

Input signals
303-FMAX1

594-STPR1 590-ACCR1
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0

- 303-FMAX1

1
STR 0

1
STL 0

t [ms]

Fig. 4.13 Example of a quick jog driving profile for two directions of rotation
(ASTER=DRV_4)

The output signals are shown in Fig. 4.4.

Caution: If the control mode is changed from FOR to VFC (parameter


300-CFCON) You have to set the parameter 597-RF0 (reac-
tion on reference value 0 Hz) unconditional to OFF because
the motor will be excited in standstill operation. This may
cause overheating of the motor.

Application Manual CDA3000 4-18


4 Preset solutions

User data set switchover (switchable offline)

S1 S2 Active UDS Example


1
0 0 UDS 1 for application 1 x-axis, traction drive
1 0 UDS 2 for application 2 y-axis, traction drive
0 1 UDS 3 for application 3 z-axis, lifting drive 2
1 1 UDS 4 for application 4 Sorting belt

Table 4.10 User data set switchover


3
Note: Please set parameter 166-UDSSL from PARAM (= DRIVEMANA-
GER, KEYPAD) to TERM (= terminals) and save changes (See sec-
tion 5.1) after setting of User data sets.
4

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-19
4 Preset solutions

4.3.5 DRV_5 Clock drive with fixed frequencies, encoder and limit switch
evaluation
Preset 5 for traction and lifting drives
Function Application
• Clock drive with time-optimized • Conveyor belt
driving profile • Rack drive
• Selection of fixed frequencies • Trolley drive
• Encoder evaluation • Spindle drive
• Limit switch evaluation • Lifting drive
• Switchover of applications

SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function


>1 k
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground
~ H1 16 OSD01 “Reference reached” message
- K1 15 OSD00 Output for motor holding brake
14 DGND Digital ground
N2
M 13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
3~
(1) B 12 ISD03 Encoder track B
A 11 ISD02 Encoder track A
STL 10 ISD01 Start/Stop counter-clockwise
STR 9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO 8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
6 UV
0 ... 10 V
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
4 AGND Analog ground
-
not assigned
3 ISA01

2 ISA00 not assigned

1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

(1) The encoder is evaluated only in control mode FOR. For notes on the
encoder see also Fig. 4.12.
Fig. 4.14 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = DRV_5

Application Manual CDA3000 4-20


4 Preset solutions

Control terminals of user module UM-8I4O

X1 Des. Function 1
1 UV 24 V supply +20%, 0.6 A
2 DGND Digital ground

S1
21 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
2
22 IED00 Umschaltung auf Fahrsätze
S2
23 IED01
S3 Selection of driving sets for fixed frequen-
ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
D-35633 Lahnau
H1 H2 H3

X4
24 IED02
cies (See section 5.5.5) 3
25 IED03
S4
26 IED04 Limit switch right
S5
27 IED05 Limit switch left
4
X1 X2
20

U
19
18

V
X15
17

S6
28 IED06
16

W
15
14

User data set switchover


1
13

S7
12

OPTN1 (X6)

29 IED07
11

3
10

!
4

RB+
9

5
8

ACHTUNG
6

RB Kondensatorent-
7

ladezeit >3 Min.

5
7

30 DGND Digital ground


6

Betriebsanleitung
8

L- beachten!
5

WARNING
4

10

capacitor disscharge
3

time >3 minutes.


11
2

Pay attention to the


12

31 DGND Digital ground


1

L1 operation manual!
ATTENTION X3
temps de decharge
16

L2 du condensteur
17

>3 min. observer le


18

mode dèmploi!
L3
H2
19

32 OED00 Warning “Inverter module overloaded”


20

H3

H4
33 OED01 Warning “Motor overloaded”
6
34 OED02 Warning “80% of IN exceeded”
H5 35 OED03 Warning “Ambient temperature too high”

7
Fig. 4.15 Assignment of control terminal expansion with ASTER = DRV_5

A
Note: If limit switch evaluation is not required, the 24 V auxiliary voltage
(UV) should be jumpered from terminal X15:21 directly to termi-
nals X15:26 and X15:27 of the limit switch inputs. As an alterna-
tive, both digital inputs can also be deactivated with function sel-
ectors 218-FIE04 and 219-FIE05 respectively, or be assigned a
different function (See section 5.2.3).

Caution: If the control mode is changed from FOR to VFC (parameter


300-CFCON) You have to set the parameter 597-RF0 (reac-
tion on reference value 0 Hz) unconditional to OFF because
the motor will be excited in standstill operation. This may
cause overheating of the motor.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-21
4 Preset solutions

Input signals v/t diagram


602-FFTB7
602-FFTB2 615-TACR7

270-FFIX1
610-TACR2 604-FFTB4
601-FFTB1
594-STPR1
590-ACCR1
608-TACR0 619-TDCR3
609-TACR1
612-TACR4
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0 611-TACR3
TDCR4
600-FFTB0

603-FFTB3

1
STR 0

1
S1 0

1
S2 0

1
S3 0

1
S4 0

t [ms]

Fig. 4.16 Example of use of table sets with fixed frequencies and ramps
(ASTER=DRV_5)

The output signals are shown in Fig. 4.4.

User data set switchover (switchable offline)

S7 S8 Active UDS Example

0 0 UDS 1 for application 1 x-axis, traction drive


1 0 UDS 2 for application 2 y-axis, traction drive
0 1 UDS 3 for application 3 z-axis, lifting drive
1 1 UDS 4 for application 4 Sorting belt

Table 4.11 User data set switchover

Note: Please set parameter 166-UDSSL from PARAM (= DRIVEMANA-


GER, KEYPAD) to TERM (= terminals) and save changes (See sec-
tion 5.1) after setting of User data sets.

Application Manual CDA3000 4-22


4 Preset solutions

4.3.6 Comparison of Comparison of application data sets for traction and lifting drives with
parameters, the factory setting (152-ASTER = DRV_1):

traction and lif- 1


ting drive

I/O Parameter Function


152-ASTER =
2
DRV_1
DRV_2 DRV_3 DRV_4 DRV_5
(FS)
First commissioning
151-ASTER Original device preset DRV_1 DRV_2 DRV_3 DRV_4 DRV_5
3
152-ASTER Preset within the active application data set DRV_1 DRV_2 DRV_3 DRV_4 DRV_5
Control location for switchover of the active
166-UDSSL PARAM 1) 1) 1) 1)
user data set 4
Current open-loop control / closed-loop
300-CFCON VFC FOR FOR
control mode of the device
Driving profile generator
579-RF0 Response with reference 0Hz OFF 0 Hz 0 Hz
5
CDA3000 inverter module inputs and outputs
Function selector analog standard input
ISA00 180-FISA0 OFF UM0 UM0 UM0
ISA00 6
Function selector analog standard input
ISA01 181-FISA1 OFF UM1 SADD1 UM1
ISA01
Function selector digital standard input
ISD00 210-FIS00
ISD00
STR 7
Function selector digital standard input
ISD01 211-FIS01 STL
ISD01

ISD02 212-FIS02
Function selector digital standard input
ISD02
SADD1 /LCW ENC ENC A
Function selector digital standard input
ISD03 213-FIS03 OFF CUSEL /LCCW ENC ENC
ISD03
OSA00 200-FOSA0 Function selector for analog output OSA00 ACTF
Function selector digital standard output
OSD00 240-FOS00 BRK_1
OSD00
Function selector digital standard output
OSD01 241-FOS01 REF
OSD01
Function selector digital standard output
OSD02 242-FOS02 S_RDY
OSD02
User module UM-8I4O inputs and outputs
IED00 214-FIE00 Function selector digital input IED00 OFF SADD1
1) After setting the parameters of the user data sets, change parameter value 166-UDSSL from PARAM (KEYPAD KP200,
DRIVEMANAGER) to TERM (terminal operation).

Table 4.12 Automatic changes by means of the assistance parameter DE


EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-23
4 Preset solutions

152-ASTER =
I/O Parameter Function DRV_1
DRV_2 DRV_3 DRV_4 DRV_5
(FS)
IED01 215-FIE01 Function selector digital input IED01 OFF FFTB0
IED02 216-FIE02 Function selector digital input IED02 OFF FFTB1
IED03 217-FIE03 Function selector digital input IED03 OFF FFTB2
IED04 218-FIE04 Function selector digital input IED04 OFF /LCW
IED05 219-FIE05 Function selector digital input IED05 OFF /LCCW
IED06 220-FIE06 Function selector digital input IED06 OFF UM0
IED07 221-FIE07 Function selector digital input IED07 OFF UM1
OED00 243-FOE00 Function selector digital output OED01 OFF WIIT
OED01 244-FOE01 Function selector digital output OED01 OFF WIT
OED02 245-FOE02 Function selector digital output OED02 OFF WIS
OED03 246-FOE03 Function selector digital output OED03 OFF WOTD
Reference structure
280-RSSL1 Reference selector 1 FMAX
289-SADD1 Offset for reference selector 1 11 11 11 0 9
Characteristic data switchover
651-CDSSL Characteristic data set switchover OFF TERM
1) After setting the parameters of the user data sets, change parameter value 166-UDSSL from PARAM (KEYPAD KP200,
DRIVEMANAGER) to TERM (terminal operation).

Table 4.12 Automatic changes by means of the assistance parameter

An empty cell means that the setting is the same as for DRV_1
(factory setting).

Application Manual CDA3000 4-24


4 Preset solutions

Active functions for traction and lifting drives

Function Effect VFC SFC FOR


1
In case of load surges a higher torque
IxR load compensation is available, and the motor heats up ✔
less
Current injection Increase in starting torque ✔ 2
Protection against current overload
Current-controlled
startup with ramp stop
shut-off in acceleration from high ✔ ✔ ✔
mass moments of inertia 3
A rotation of the motor shaft without
DC holding
load will be counteracted

Increase starting and standstill tor-
Magnetizing
que
✔ ✔ 4
Table 4.13 Active functions

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-25
4 Preset solutions

4.4 Rotational drive Loading one of the application data sets ROT_1 to ROT_3 into the RAM
by setting parameter 152-ASTER causes the inverter module automati-
cally to adopt the preset of the software functions as well as all inputs and
outputs for the “rotational drive” application.

Active functions in the preset

152-Aster =
Function

ROT_1

ROT_2

ROT_3
v
Table sets with fixed
frequencies and ramps

t

Speed input
-10 to +10 V
✔ ✔ ✔

Speed correction
0 to 10 V
✔ ✔

n Speed change
via button ✔
n
(MOP function)

1 2
User data set
001 MODE 001 MODE
switchover

999 xyz 999 xyz

Table 4.14 Presets: Rotational drives

Application Manual CDA3000 4-26


4 Preset solutions

152-Aster =
Function
1

ROT_1

ROT_2

ROT_3
Encoder evaluation
M (necessary for control ✔ ✔ 2
3~ mode FOR)

Messages:
• Reference 3
reached ✔ ✔ ✔
• Standstill
• Ready to start
Warnings: 4
• Inverter module
overloaded
• 80% of IN
reached ✔ 5
• Motor overloaded
• Inverter ambient
temperature too
high
6
Table 4.14 Presets: Rotational drives

7
Aster Brief description Page reference

ROT_1 "Analog speed input" Page 4-28

ROT_2
"Analog speed input with correction value and encoder
Page 4-30
A
evaluation"
ROT_3 "Analog speed input with switchover to driving sets" Page 4-32

Table 4.15 Brief description

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-27
4 Preset solutions

4.4.1 ROT_1 Analog speed input


Preset 1 for Rotational drives

Function Application

• Analog speed input for two directions • Spindle


of rotation • Winding drive
• Adjustment of speed via button • Vacuum pumps
(MOP function) • Extruder
• Stirrer
• etc.

X2 Des. Function
+24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K2
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground
H2 16 OSD01 “Reference reached” message
H1 15 OSD00 “Standstill” message
14 DGND Digital ground
13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
S2 12 ISD03 Reduce speed
S1 11 ISD02 Increase speed
STL 10 ISD01 Start/Stop counter-clockwise
STR 9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO 8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
6 UV
0 ... 10 V
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
4 AGND Analog ground
R1
-
3 ISA01 not assigned
10 k
2 ISA00 Reference -10 V ... + 10 V
1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.17 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = ROT_1

Note: Comparison of parameters for rotational drives see Page 4-32.

Application Manual CDA3000 4-28


4 Preset solutions

Input signals v/t diagram


1
FMAX 303-FMAX1
590-ACCR1
592-DECR1 594-STPR1

f [Hz] 0
2
FMAX

3
1
STR 0

1
STL 0
4
10 V
R1

5V

0V
5
(1) Reference value of ISA00
Fig. 4.18 Example of a driving profile for two directions of rotation
(ASTER=ROT_1)
6
Output signals

FMAX 7
f [Hz] 0
A
FMAX

H12

H11

t[ ]
H2 Speed reached
H1 Standstill
Fig. 4.19 Output signals dependent on driving profile
(ASTER=ROT_1, ROT_2 and ROT_4)

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-29
4 Preset solutions

4.4.2 ROT_2 Analog speed input with correction value and encoder
evaluation
Preset 2 for rotational drives

Function Application

• Analog speed input for two directions • Spindle


of rotation • Winding drive
• Adjustment of speed via correction • Extruder
value • etc.
• Encoder evaluation

SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function


>1 k
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground
H2 16 OSD01 “Reference reached” message
H1 15 OSD00 Output for motor holding brake
14 DGND Digital ground
N2
M 13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
3~
(1) B 12 ISD03 Encoder track B
A 11 ISD02 Encoder track A
STL 10 ISD01 Start/Stop counter-clockwise
STR 9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO 8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
6 UV
0 ... 10 V
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
4 AGND Analog ground
-
R2 3 ISA01 Correction value 0 V ... + 10 V
10 k
2 ISA00 Reference -10 V ... + 10 V
10 k R1

1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

(1) The encoder is evaluated only in control mode FOR. For notes on the
encoder see also Fig. 4.12.
Fig. 4.20 Control terminal device with ASTER=ROT_2

Application Manual CDA3000 4-30


4 Preset solutions

Note: Comparison of parameters for rotational drives see Page 4-35.


1
Input signals
2

f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0 3

STR
1
0
4
1
STL 0

t [ms] 5
(1) Reference value of ISA00
Fig. 4.21 Example of a driving profile for two directions of rotation
(ASTER=ROT_2) 6

The output signals are shown in Fig. 4.19.


7

A
Caution: If the control mode is changed from FOR to VFC (parameter
300-CFCON) You have to set the parameter 597-RF0 (reac-
tion on reference value 0 Hz) unconditional to OFF because
the motor will be excited in standstill operation. This may
cause overheating of the motor.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-31
4 Preset solutions

4.4.3 ROT_3 Analog speed input with switchover to driving sets


Preset 3 for rotational drives

Function Application

• Analog speed input for two directions • Spindle


of rotation • Winding drive
• Adjustment of speed via correction • etc.
value
• Selection of fixed frequencies
• Switchover of applications
• Encoder evaluation

SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function


>1 k
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground
H2 16 OSD01 “Reference reached” message
H1 15 OSD00 Output for motor holding brake
14 DGND Digital ground
N2
M 13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
3~
(1) B 12 ISD03 Encoder track B
A 11 ISD02 Encoder track A
STL 10 ISD01 Start/Stop counter-clockwise
STR 9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO 8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
6 UV
0 ... 10 V
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
4 AGND Analog ground
-
R2 3 ISA01 Correction value 0 V ... + 10 V
10 k
2 ISA00 Reference -10 V ... + 10 V
10 k R1
1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

(1) The encoder is evaluated only in control mode FOR. For notes on the
encoder see also Fig. 4.12.
Fig. 4.22 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = ROT_3

Application Manual CDA3000 4-32


4 Preset solutions

Control terminals of user module UM-8I4O

X1 Des. Function 1
1 UV 24 V supply +20%, 0.6 A
2 DGND Digital ground

S1
21 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
2
22 IED00 Switchover to driving sets
S2
23 IED01
S3 Selection of fixed frequencies (See section
ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
D-35633 Lahnau
H1 H2 H3

X4
S4
24 IED02
5.5.4) 3
25 IED03
S5
26 IED04
S6 User data set switchover
27 IED05
4
X1 X2
20

U
19
18

V
X15
17

28 IED06
16

W
15
14

not assigned
1
13

2
12

OPTN1 (X6)

29 IED07
11

3
10

!
4

RB+
9

5
8

ACHTUNG
6

RB Kondensatorent-
7

ladezeit >3 Min.

5
7

30 DGND Digital ground


6

Betriebsanleitung
8

L- beachten!
5

WARNING
4

10

capacitor disscharge
3

time >3 minutes.


11
2

Pay attention to the


12

31 DGND Digital ground


1

L1 operation manual!
ATTENTION X3
temps de decharge
16

L2 du condensteur
17

>3 min. observer le


18

mode dèmploi!
L3
H3
19

32 OED00 Warning “Inverter module overloaded”


20

H4

H5
33 OED01 Warning “Motor overloaded”
6
34 OED02 Warning “80% of IN exceeded”
H6 35 OED03 Warning “Ambient temperature too high”

7
Fig. 4.23 Assignment of control terminal expansion with ASTER = ROT_3

A
Note: Comparison of parameters for rotational drives see Page 4-35.

Caution: If the control mode is changed from FOR to VFC (parameter


300-CFCON) You have to set the parameter 597-RF0 (reac-
tion on reference value 0 Hz) unconditional to OFF because
the motor will be excited in standstill operation. This may
cause overheating of the motor.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-33
4 Preset solutions

Input signals v/t diagram


602-FFTB7
602-FFTB2 615-TACR7

270-FFIX1
610-TACR2 604-FFTB4
601-FFTB1
594-STPR1
590-ACCR1
608-TACR0 619-TDCR3
609-TACR1
612-TACR4
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0 611-TACR3
TDCR4
600-FFTB0

603-FFTB3

1
STR 0

1
S1 0

1
S2 0

1
S3 0

1
S4 0

t [ms]

Fig. 4.24 Example of use of table sets with ramps (ASTER = ROT_3)

The output signals are shown in Fig. 4.19.

User data set switchover (switchable offline)

S5 S6 Active UDS Example

0 0 UDS 1 for application 1 Spindle 1


1 0 UDS 2 for application 2 Spindle 2
0 1 UDS 3 for application 3 Spindle 3
1 1 UDS 4 for application 4 Sorting belt

Table 4.16 User data set switchover

Application Manual CDA3000 4-34


4 Preset solutions

4.4.4 Comparison of Comparison of the application data sets for rotational drives with the
parameters, factory setting (152-ASTER = DRV_1):

rotational 1
drives
152-ASTER =
2
I/O Parameter Function DRV_1
ROT_1 ROT_2 ROT_3
(FS)
Initial commissioning
3
151-ASTER Original device preset DRV_1 ROT_1 ROT_2 ROT_3
152-ASTER Preset within the active application data set DRV_1 ROT_1 ROT_2 ROT_3
Control location for switchover of the active user
166-UDSSL
data set
PARAM 1) 4
Current open-loop control / closed-loop control
300-CFCON VFC FOR FOR
mode of the device
Driving profile generator
5
579-RF0 Response with reference 0Hz OFF 0 Hz 0 Hz
CDA3000 inverter module inputs and outputs
ISA00 180-FISA0 Function selector analog standard input ISA00 OFF PM10 V PM10 V PM10 V
ISA01 181-FISA1 Function selector analog standard input ISA01 OFF 0-10V 0-10 V
6
ISD00 210-FIS00 Function selector digital standard input ISD00 STR
ISD01 211-FIS01 Function selector digital standard input ISD01 STL
ISD02 212-FIS02 Function selector digital standard input ISD02 SADD1 MP-UP ENC ENC 7
ISD03 213-FIS03 Function selector digital standard input ISD03 OFF MP-DN ENC ENC
OSA00 200-FOSA0 Function selector for analog output OSA00 ACTF

OSD00 240-FOS00
Function selector digital standard
output OSD00
BRK_1 REF REF REF A
Function selector digital standard
OSD01 241-FOS01 REF ROT_0 ROT_0 ROT_0
output OSD01
OSD02 242-FOS02 Function selector digital standard output OSD02 S_RDY
User module UM-8I4O inputs and outputs
IED00 214-FIE00 Function selector digital input IED00 OFF SADD1
IED01 215-FIE01 Function selector digital input IED01 OFF FFTB0
IED02 216-FIE02 Function selector digital input IED02 OFF FFTB1
IED03 217-FIE03 Function selector digital input IED03 OFF FFTB2
IED04 218-FIE04 Function selector digital input IED04 OFF UM0
IED05 219-FIE05 Function selector digital input IED05 OFF UM1
1) After setting the parameters of the user data sets, change parameter value 166-UDSSL from PARAM (KEYPAD KP200,
DRIVEMANAGER) to TERM (terminal operation).

Table 4.17 Automatic changes by means of the assistance parameter DE


EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-35
4 Preset solutions

152-ASTER =
I/O Parameter Function DRV_1
ROT_1 ROT_2 ROT_3
(FS)
OED01 243-FOE00 Function selector digital output OED01 OFF WIIT
OED01 244-FOE01 Function selector digital output OED01 OFF WIT
OED02 245-FOE02 Function selector digital output OED02 OFF WIS
OED03 246-FOE03 Function selector digital output OED03 OFF WOTD
Reference structure
280-RSSL1 Reference selector 1 FMAX FA0 FA0 FA0
281-RSSL2 Reference selector 2 FCON FA1 FA1
289-SADD1 Offset for reference selector 1 11 0 0 7
MOP function
320-MPSEL Configuration for motor operated potentiometer 0 1
Current-controlled startup
640-CLSL1 DS1: Function selector 2 1 1 1
645-CLSL2 DS2: Function selector 2 1 1 1
DC holding
681-HODCT Holding time 0.5 0 0 0
1) After setting the parameters of the user data sets, change parameter value 166-UDSSL from PARAM (KEYPAD KP200,
DRIVEMANAGER) to TERM (terminal operation).

Table 4.17 Automatic changes by means of the assistance parameter

An empty cell means that the setting is the same as for DRV_1
(factory setting).

Active functions of rotational drives

Function Effect VFC SFC FOR

In case of load surges a higher torque


IxR load compensation is available, and the motor heats up ✔
less
Current injection Increase in starting torque ✔
Protection against current overload
Current-controlled
startup with ramp stop
shut-off in acceleration from high ✔ ✔ ✔
mass moments of inertia
Increase starting and standstill tor-
Magnetizing ✔ ✔
que

Table 4.18 Active Functions

Application Manual CDA3000 4-36


4 Preset solutions

4.5 Field bus opera- Setting parameter 152-ASTER loads one of the application data sets
tion BUS_1 to BUS_3 into the RAM (see Fig. 4.1). As a result the software
functions and the inputs and outputs for the “field bus operation” applica- 1
tion are preset.
The precondition for field bus operation is that an appropriate communi-
cation module is mounted on the CDA3000.
2

SPS
+ + + +

3
+ + + +

(1)

4
CPU ~= CPU ~= CPU ~=
~ (2)
~ (2)
~ (2)
5
M M M
3~ (3) 3~ (3) 3~ (3)

6
n1 n1 n1
(4) (4) (4)
n2 n2 n2
7
Process (5)

(1) Field bus A


(2) Inverter module
(3) IEC standard motor
(4) Gearing
(5) Application
Fig. 4.25 Drive solution: “Field bus operation”

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-37
4 Preset solutions

Active functions in the preset

BUS_1

BUS_2

BUS_3
Function ASTER

SPS/PLC
Reference and control
via PLC
✔ ✔ ✔
1

1
2

2
3

3
4

4
5

5
6

6
7

7
8

8
9

9
10

10
11

11
12

12
13

13
14

14
15

15
16

16
17

17
18

18
19

19
20

20

IN1
IN2 Digital inputs and
IN3
IN4 outputs readable and ✔
OUT1 writable over the bus
OUT2
OUT3

Manual mode indepen-


dent of bus
✔ ✔

Limit switch evaluation ✔

Table 4.19 Presets: Field bus operation

Aster Brief description Page reference

BUS_1 "Control via field bus (complete)" Page 4-39


BUS_2 "Additional emergency operation" Page 4-40
"Additional emergency operation with limit switch eva-
BUS_3 Page 4-42
luation"

Table 4.20 Brief description

Application Manual CDA3000 4-38


4 Preset solutions

4.5.1 BUS_1 Control via field bus (complete)


Preset 1 for field bus operation
1
Function Application

• Control of the inverter • • Traction and lifting drive


module over the field bus • Rotational drive 2
• All digital inputs and outputs
can be set and read over the
bus.
3
X2 Des. Function
20 OSD02/14
19 OSD02/11
Digital output 3:
Relay with changeover contact
4
X10
18 OSD02/12
1
2
H1 H2 H3
17 DGND Digital ground
OPTN2 (X7)

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
X4 X11

5
D-35633 Lahnau

16 OSD01 Digital output 2


X12
15 OSD00 Digital output 1
X1 X2
14 DGND Digital ground
20

U
19
18

6
V
17
16

W
13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
15
14
13
12
11

12 ISD03 Digital input 4


10

RB+ !
9
8

ACHTUNG
RB Kondensatorent-
7

ladezeit >3 Min.


6

Betriebsanleitung
L- beachten!
11 ISD02 Digital input 3
5

WARNING
4

capacitor disscharge
3

time >3 minutes.

7
2

Pay attention to the


1

L1 operation manual!
X3
10 ISD01 Digital input 2
ATTENTION
temps de decharge
L2 du condensteur
>3 min. observer le
mode dèmploi!
L3

9 ISD00 Digital input 1


ENPO
8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
A
6 UV
5 OSA00 Analog output
Analog ground
4 AGND 0 ... 10 V corresponding to
0 ... FMAX
3 ISA01 Analog output 2
2 ISA00 Analog output 1
1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.26 Control terminal configuration with ASTER = BUS_2

Note: Comparison of parameters for field bus operation see Page 4-44.
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-39
4 Preset solutions

4.5.2 BUS_2 Additional emergency operation


Preset 2 for field bus operation

Function Application
• Control of the inverter module over • Traction and lifting drive
the field bus • Rotational drive
• Control of the device in emergency
also independently of field bus
• Manual/automatic switchover
• Setting and reading of digital inputs
and outputs over the bus

SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function


>1 k
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground
X10

H1 H2 H3
1
2 16 OSD01 Digital output 2
OPTN2 (X7)

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
D-35633 Lahnau X4 X11
15 OSD00 Digital output 1
X12 14 DGND Digital ground
X1 X2
13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
20

U
19
18

V
17

12 ISD03 Digital input 4


16

W
15
14
13

S1
12

11 ISD02 Selection of manual mode


11
10

RB+ !
9
8

ACHTUNG
RB Kondensatorent-
STL
7

ladezeit >3 Min.

10 ISD01
6

L-
Betriebsanleitung
beachten! Start/Stop counter-clockwise manual mode
5

WARNING
4

capacitor disscharge
3

time >3 minutes.

STR
2

Pay attention to the

9 ISD00
1

L1 operation manual!

L2
ATTENTION
temps de decharge
X3 Start/Stop clockwise for manual mode
du condensteur
>3 min. observer le
mode dèmploi!
L3
ENPO
8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
0 ... 10 V
6 UV
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX

- 4 AGND Analog ground


R1
3 ISA01 not assigned
10 k
2 ISA00 Reference for manual mode 0...10 V

1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.27 Control terminal configuration with ASTER=BUS_2

Application Manual CDA3000 4-40


4 Preset solutions

Input signals
(1)

1
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0
2
1
S1 0

STR
1
0
3
1
STL 0

t [ms] 4
(1) Analog reference value of ISA00
Fig. 4.28 Example of use of manual mode independently of bus operation
ASTER = BUS_2
5

Note: Comparison of parameters for field bus operation see Page 4-44.
6

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-41
4 Preset solutions

4.5.3 BUS_3 Additional emergency operation with limit switch evaluation


Field bus operation (preset 11)

Function Application

• Control of the inverter module over • Traction and lifting drive


the field bus
• Control of the device in emergency
also independently of bus
• Manual/automatic switchover
• Evaluation of safety limit switches

SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function


>1 k
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
X10

H1 H2 H3
1
2 17 DGND Digital ground
OPTN2 (X7)

ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
D-35633 Lahnau X4 X11
16 OSD01 Digital output 2
X12
15 OSD00 Digital output 1
X1 X2
14 DGND Digital ground
20

U
19
18

V
17

13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
16

W
15
14
13
12

S4 12 ISD03 Limit switch left


11
10

RB+ !
9
8

ACHTUNG
RB Kondensatorent-
7

ladezeit >3 Min.


S3 11 ISD02 Limit switch right
6

Betriebsanleitung
L- beachten!
5

WARNING
4

capacitor disscharge
3

time >3 minutes.


2

Pay attention to the


STL 10 ISD01 Start/Stop counter-clockwise
1

L1 operation manual!
ATTENTION X3
temps de decharge
L2 du condensteur
>3 min. observer le
mode dèmploi!
L3
STR 9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO 8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
6 UV
0 ... 10 V
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
4 AGND Analog ground
-
S1 3 ISA01 Selection of manual mode
2 ISA00 Reference for manual mode 0...10 V
R1
10 k
1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.29 Control terminal configuration with ASTER = BUS_3

Application Manual CDA3000 4-42


4 Preset solutions

1
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0
2
1
S1 0

STR
1
0
3
1
STL 0

t [ms] 4
(1) Analog reference value of ISA00
Fig. 4.30 Example of use of emergency operation independently of bus
operation ASTER = BUS_3 5

Note: The mode of functioning of the limit switch evaluation is shown in


Fig. 4.9 and Fig. 4.10 in section 4.3.3.
6

Note: Comparison of parameters for field bus operation see Page 4-44. 7

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-43
4 Preset solutions

4.5.4 Comparison Comparison of the application data sets for field bus operation with the
of parameters, factory setting (152-ASTER = DRV_1):
field bus
operation
152-ASTER =
I/O Parameter Function DRV_1
BUS_1 BUS_2 BUS_3
(FS)
Initial commissioning
151-ASTER Original device preset DRV_1 BUS_1 BUS_2 BUS_3
152-ASTER Preset within the active application data set DRV_1 BUS_1 BUS_2 BUS_3
Control location for switchover of the active user data
166-UDSSL PARAM 1) 1) 1)
set
CDA3000 inverter module inputs and outputs
ISA00 180-FISA0 Function selector analog standard input ISA00 OFF OPTN2 PM10V PM10V
ISA01 181-FISA1 Function selector analog standard input ISA01 OFF OPTN2 MAN
ISD00 210-FIS00 Function selector digital standard input ISD00 STR OPTN2 STR STR
ISD01 211-FIS01 Function selector digital standard input ISD01 STL OPTN2 STL STL
ISD02 212-FIS02 Function selector digital standard input ISD02 SADD1 OPTN2 MAN /LCW
ISD03 213-FIS03 Function selector digital standard input ISD03 OFF OPTN2 OPTN2 /LCCW
OSA00 200-FOSA0 Function selector for analog output OSA00 ACTF OFF
OSD00 240-FOS00 Function selector digital standard output OSD00 BRK_1 OPTN2 OPTN2 OPTN2
OSD01 241-FOS01 Function selector digital standard output OSD01 REF OPTN2 OPTN2 OPTN2
OSD02 242-FOS02 Function selector digital standard output OSD02 S_RDY OPTN2
Reference structure
280-RSSL1 Reference selector 1 FMAX OPTN2 OPTN2 OPTN2
281-RSSL2 Reference selector 2 FCON
289-SADD1 Offset for reference selector 1 10 0 0 0
Control location
260-CLSEL Control location selector TERM OPTN2 OPTN2 OPTN2
1) After setting the parameters of the user data sets, change parameter value 166-UDSSL from PARAM (KEYPAD KP200,
DRIVEMANAGER) to TERM (terminal operation).

Table 4.21 Automatic changes by means of the assistance parameter

An empty cell means that the setting is the same as for DRV_1
(factory setting).

Application Manual CDA3000 4-44


4 Preset solutions

Active functions of field bus operation

Function Effect VFC SFC FOR


1
In case of load surges a higher torque
IxR load compensation is available, and the motor heats up ✔
less
Current injection Increase in starting torque ✔ 2
Protection against current overload
Current-controlled
startup with ramp stop
shut-off in acceleration from high ✔ ✔ ✔
mass moments of inertia 3
Rotation of the rotor due to the load on
DC holding
the motor is prevented

Increase starting and standstill tor-
Magnetizing
que
✔ ✔ 4
Table 4.22 Active Functions

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-45
4 Preset solutions

4.6 Master/Slave Application data sets M-S_1 to M-S_4 contain settings for Master/Slave
operation operation between inverter modules. In this way the speeds of a maxi-
mum of six drives are permanently coupled together.

(1)

FU0 FU1 FU2


~= i1 ~= i2 ~=
CPU
~ CPU ~ CPU ~
(2.1) (2.2) (2.2)

M M M
3~ 3~ 3~
(3) (3) (3)

n0 n1 = n0 . i1 n2 = n0 . i2

(4)
Process

(1) Reference coupling


(2) Inverter module
(2.1)Master
(2.2)Slave
(3) IEC standard motor
(4) Application
Fig. 4.31 Drive solution: “Master/Slave operation”

In Master/Slave operation the reference values of the inverter modules


are permanently coupled together. This reference coupling can be effec-
ted with up to six units, with one unit being the master. The reference
value of the master is also the guide value for the devices connected to
the master (slaves). The master transmits the reference value to the
slaves by way of a data telegram. In each slave the guide value received
from the master can be scaled, meaning that any desired transmission
ratios can be set. In this way it is possible to replace mechanical speed
couplings.

Note: The coupling of the electrical axles is speed-synchronous in con-


trol modes VFC and SFC. Only in control mode FOR the motors
are angle-synchronous.

Application Manual CDA3000 4-46


4 Preset solutions

Master
1
Reference M1 n = 3000 rpm
3000 rpm X2 3~
16
17

Slave 1
2
i=2
M2 n = 1500 rpm
X2 3~
10
14 3
Slave 2

X2
i=3
M3
3~
n = 1000 rpm
4
10
14

5
Slave 5

i=5

X2
10
M6
3~
n = 600 rpm
6
14

Fig. 4.32 Master/Slave coupling via two control cables


7

Note: The motors run speed-synchronously, not angle-synchronously. In


primary frequency coupling a dead time of max. 2 ms is created A
between the axles.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-47
4 Preset solutions

n = 3000 rpm

Master

n [rpm]

Slave 1
i=2
n = 1500 rpm

Slave 2
i=3

n = 1000 rpm

Slave 5
i=5
n = 600 rpm

t [ms]

Fig. 4.33 Speed curve in Master/Slave operation

Application Manual CDA3000 4-48


4 Preset solutions

Active functions in the preset

152-ASTER =
1
Function

M-S11)

M-S22)
M-S33)
M-S44)
MASTER
2
Inverter module is
master
✔ ✔
SLAVE SLAVE
3
MASTER
Inverter module
✔ ✔
SLAVE SLAVE
is slave 4

n
Speed change via 5
button (MOP function)
✔ ✔
n

6
M Encoder evaluation ✔ ✔
3~

Messages:
7
• Standstill ✔ ✔✔ ✔
• Ready to start
A
Table 4.23 Presets: Master/Slave operation

Aster Brief description Page reference

M-S_1 "Master drive with analog guide value input" Page 4-50
M-S_2 "Master drive with encoder evaluation" Page 4-52
M-S_3 "Slave drive" Page 4-54
M-S_4 "Slave drive with encoder evaluation" Page 4-56

Table 4.24 Brief description

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-49
4 Preset solutions

4.6.1 M-S_1 Master drive with analog guide value input


Preset 1 for Master/Slave operation

Function Application

• Speed synchronism of several drives • Replacement of mechanical gears


with programmable transmission and line shafts
ratio (not angle-synchronous)
• Inverter module is master • Winding drive
• Digital guide value input • Drafting equipment
• Adjustment of guide value via button • Trolley drive
(MOP function)

SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function


>1 k
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
Slave 18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
DGND 17 DGND Digital ground
X2/10 16 OSD01 Slave interface
H1
15 OSD00 “Standstill” message
14 DGND Digital ground
13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
S2
12 ISD03 Reduce speed
S1
11 ISD02 Increase speed
STL
10 ISD01 Start/Stop counter-clockwise
STR
9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO
8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
0 ... 10 V
6 UV
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX

- 4 AGND Analog ground


R1
3 ISA01 not assigned
10 k
2 ISA00 Reference -10 V ... + 10 V

1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.34 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = M-S_1

Application Manual CDA3000 4-50


4 Preset solutions

Input signals v/t diagram


(1)

590-ACCR1
592-DECR1
1
590-ACCR1
f [Hz] 592-DECR1

v [m/s] 0 590-ACCR1
594-STPR1 2
(1)

1
STR 0

STL
1 3
0

1
S1 0

S2
1
0
4
(2)

t [ms] 5
(1) Analog reference value of ISA00
(2) DC braking torque
Fig. 4.35 Example of a driving profile for two directions of rotation
(ASTER=ROT_2)
6

Output signals
7

f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0 A

1
H1 0

t [ms]

H1 Standstill
Fig. 4.36 Output signals dependent on driving profile
(ASTER=M-S_1 and M-S_2)

Note: Comparison of parameters for M/S operation see Page 4-58.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-51
4 Preset solutions

4.6.2 M-S_2 Master drive with encoder evaluation


Preset 2 for Master/Slave operation

Function Application

• Speed synchronism of several drives • Replacement of mechanical gears


with programmable transmission and line shafts
ratio (not angle-synchronous)
• Inverter module is master • Winding drive
• Digital guide value input • Drafting equipment
• Encoder evaluation • Trolley drive

SPS/PLC X2 Des. Function


>1 k
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
Slave
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
DGND 17 DGND Digital ground
X2/10 16 OSD01 Slave interface
H1 15 OSD00 “Standstill” message
14 DGND Digital ground
N2
M 13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
3~
(1) B 12 ISD03 Encoder track B
A
11 ISD02 Encoder track A
STL
10 ISD01 Start/Stop counter-clockwise
STR
9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO
8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
6 UV
0 ... 10 V
N1 + 5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX

- 4 AGND Analog ground


R1
3 ISA01 not assigned
10 k
2 ISA00 Reference -10 V ... + 10 V
1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.37 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = M-S_2

Note: Comparison of parameters for M/S operation see Page 4-58.

Application Manual CDA3000 4-52


4 Preset solutions

Input signals
(1) (1) 1
590-ACCR1 594-STPR1 590-ACCR1
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0
2
590-ACCR1 592-DECR1

(1)

1
3
STR 0

1
STL 0
4
(2)

t [ms]

(1) Analog reference value of ISA00


5
(2) DC braking torque
Fig. 4.38 Example of a driving profile for two directions of rotation
(ASTER=M-S_2) 6

The basic characteristic of the output signals is shown in Fig. 4.36.


7

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-53
4 Preset solutions

4.6.3 M-S_3 Slave drive


Preset 3 for Master/Slave operation

Function Application

• Speed synchronism of several drives • Replacement of mechanical gears


with programmable transmission and line shafts
ratio (not angle-synchronous)
• Inverter module is slave • Winding drive
• Adjustment of guide value via button • Drafting equipment
(MOP function) • Trolley drive

SPS/PLC
>1 k
X2 Des. Function
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground
16 OSD01 Disabled in M/S operation
H1
Master 15 OSD00 “Standstill” message
DGND 14 DGND Digital ground
13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
S2
12 ISD03 Reduce speed
S1
11 ISD02 Increase speed
X2/16 10 ISD01 Master interface
STR
9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO
8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
0 ... 10 V 6 UV
N1 +
5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
- 4 AGND Analog ground
3 ISA01 not assigned
2 ISA00 not assigned
1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.39 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = M-S_3; with S1 and
S2 an offset can be added to or subtracted from the guide value

Application Manual CDA3000 4-54


4 Preset solutions

Input signals

1
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0
2
1
STR 0

S1 1
3
0

S2 1
0

DC-Halte-
4
moment

t [ms]
(1) Guide value from master 5
(2) DC braking torque
Fig. 4.40 Example of a driving profile with Master/Slave coupling
(ASTER = M-S_3)
6
Output signals

7
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0
A
H1 1
0

H2 1
0

t [ms]
H1 Reference reached
H2 Standstill
Fig. 4.41 Output signals dependent on driving profile
(ASTER = M-S_3 and M-S_4)

Note: Comparison of parameters for M/S operation see Page 4-58.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-55
4 Preset solutions

4.6.4 M-S_4 Slave drive with encoder evaluation


Preset 4 for Master/Slave operation

Function Application

• Speed synchronism of several drives • Replacement of mechanical gears


with programmable transmission and line shafts
ratio (not angle-synchronous)
• Inverter module is slave • Winding drive
• Encoder evaluation • Drafting equipment
• Trolley drive

SPS/PLC
>1 k
X2 Des. Function
+24V +24V 20 OSD02/14 Relay contact (make)
IN 19 OSD02/11 for “Ready” message
K0
18 OSD02/12 Relay contact (break)
17 DGND Digital ground
16 OSD01 Disabled in M/S operation
H1
Master 15 OSD00 “Standstill” message
DGND 14 DGND Digital ground
13 UV Auxiliary voltage 24 V
N2 B
12 ISD03 Encoder track B
A
(1) 11 ISD02 Encoder track A
X2/16 10 ISD01 Master interface
STR
9 ISD00 Start/Stop clockwise
ENPO
8 ENPO Power stage hardware enable
7 UV
Auxiliary voltage 24 V
0 ... 10 V 6 UV
N1 +
5 OSA00 Actual frequency 0 ... FMAX
- 4 AGND Analog ground
3 ISA01 not assigned
2 ISA00 not assigned
1 UR Reference voltage 10V, 10mA

Fig. 4.42 Control terminal assignment with ASTER = M-S_4

Note: Comparison of parameters for M/S operation see Page 4-58.

Application Manual CDA3000 4-56


4 Preset solutions

Input signals
1

f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0
2

1
3
STR 0

S1 1
0

S2 1
4
0

(1) Guide value from master


(2) DC braking torque 5
Fig. 4.43 Example of a driving profile with Master/Slave coupling
(ASTER = M-S_4)

6
The basic characteristic of the output signals is shown in Fig. 4.41.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-57
4 Preset solutions

4.6.5 Comparison of Comparison of the application data sets for Master/Slave operation with
parameters, the factory setting (152-ASTER = DRV_1):

Master/Slave
operation
152-ASTER =
I/O Parameter Function DRV_1
M-S_1 M-S_2 M-S_3 M-S_4
(FS)
Initial commissioning
151-ASTER Original device preset DRV_1 M-S_1 M-S_2 M-S_3 M-S_4
152-ASTER Preset within the active application data set DRV_1 M-S_1 M-S_2 M-S_3 M-S_4
Control location for switchover of the active user
166-UDSSL PARAM 1) 1) 1) 1)
data set
Current open-loop control / closed-loop control
300-CFCON VFC FOR FOR
mode of the device
Driving profile generator
579-RF0 Response with reference 0Hz OFF 0 Hz 0 Hz
CDA3000 inverter module inputs and outputs
ISA00 180-FISA0 Function selector analog standard input ISA00 OFF PM10V PM10V
ISD01 211-FIS00 Function selector digital standard input ISD01 STL FSMI FSMI
ISD02 212-FIS02 Function selector digital standard input ISD02 SADD1 MP-UP ENC MP-UP ENC
ISD03 213-FIS03 Function selector digital standard input ISD03 OFF MP-DN ENC MP-DN ENC
OSA00 200-FOSA0 Function selector for analog output OSA00 ACTF
OSD00 240-FOS00 Function selector digital standard output OSD00 BRK_1 ROT_0 ROT_0 ROT_0 ROT_0
OSD01 241-FOS01 Function selector digital standard output OSD01 REF FMSO FMSO OFF OFF
OSD02 242-FOS02 Function selector digital standard output OSD02 S_RDY
Reference structure
280-RSSL1 Reference selector 1 FMAX FA0 FA0 FDIG FDIG
281-RSSL2 Reference selector 2 FCON
289-SADD1 Offset for reference selector 1 10 0 0 0
MOP function
320-MPSEL Configuration for motor operated potentiometer 0 1 1
Current-controlled startup
640-CLSL1 DS1: Function selector 2 1 1 1
645-CLSL2 DS2: Function selector 2 1 1 1
681-HODCT Holding time 0.5 0 0
1) After setting the parameters of the user data sets, change parameter value 166-UDSSL from PARAM (KEYPAD KP200,
DRIVEMANAGER) to TERM (terminal operation).

Table 4.25 Automatic changes by means of the assistance parameter

Application Manual CDA3000 4-58


4 Preset solutions

An empty cell means that the setting is the same as for DRV_1
(factory setting). 1

Active functions for Master/Slave operation 2


Function Effect VFC SFC FOR

IxR load compensation


In case of load surges a higher torque
is available, and the motor heats up ✔
3
less
Current injection Increase in starting torque ✔
Protection against current overload
4
Current-controlled
startup with ramp stop
shut-off in acceleration from high ✔ ✔ ✔
mass moments of inertia

DC holding
Rotation of the rotor due to the load on
the motor is prevented
✔ 5
Increase starting and standstill tor-
Magnetizing ✔ ✔
que

Table 4.26 Active functions


6

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 4-59
4 Preset solutions

Application Manual CDA3000 4-60


1

2
5 Software functions
3
5.1 _15FC-Initial commissioning ..................................5-4
5.2 Inputs and outputs ................................................5-10 4
5.2.1 _18IA-Analog inputs ..........................................5-10
5.2.2 _200A-Analog output .........................................5-14
5.2.3 _21ID-Digital inputs ..........................................5-17
5.2.4 _24OD-Digital outputs .......................................5-21
5
5.2.5 _25CK-Clock input/Clock output ........................5-24
5.2.6 _28RS-Reference structure ...............................5-26
5.2.7 _26CL-Control location ......................................5-34 6
5.3 Protection and information ...................................5-37
5.3.1 _30OL-Frequency limitation ...............................5-37
5.3.2 _33MO-Motor protection ...................................5-39 7
5.3.3 Device protection ...............................................5-45
5.3.4 _34PF-Power failure bridging ............................5-47
5.3.5 _36KP-KEYPAD ...................................................5-51 A
5.3.6 _38TX-Device capacity utilization ......................5-53
5.3.7 _39DD-Device data ...........................................5-55
5.3.8 _VAL-Actual values ............................................5-56
5.3.9 _50WA-Warning messages ................................5-59
5.3.10 _51ER-Error messages ......................................5-62
5.4 Bus operation and option modules ......................5-65
5.4.1 _55LB-LUSTBUS ..................................................5-65
5.4.2 _57OP-Option modules ......................................5-67

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-1
5 Software functions

5.5 Open-loop and closed-loop control .....................5-69


5.5.1 _31MB-Motor holding brake .............................. 5-69
5.5.2 _32MP-MOP function ........................................ 5-71
5.5.3 _59DP-Driving profile generator ........................ 5-74
5.5.4 _27FF-Fixed frequencies ................................... 5-78
5.5.5 _60TB-Driving sets ............................................ 5-79
5.5.6 _65CS-Characteristic data set (CDS) ................. 5-82
5.5.7 _66MS-Master/Slave operation ......................... 5-84
5.5.8 _67BR-DC braking ............................................ 5-87
5.5.9 _68HO-DC holding-on ....................................... 5-90
5.5.10 _80CC-Current controller ................................... 5-91
5.5.11 _64CA-Current-controlled startup ...................... 5-93
5.5.12 _69PM-Modulation ............................................ 5-98
5.5.13 _84MD-Motor data .......................................... 5-101

Control method parameters: ➔6 "Control modes".


Overview of all parameters: ➔Appendix A "Overview of parameters".

Explanatory notes on the following tables

”Online” column
Many parameters can be altered online that is to say the changed value
takes effect immediately. That means that, to adopt a changed parameter
value, the new parameter value merely has to be confirmed by pressing
the Enter key.
Therefore these parameters do not require controller initialization by
briefly removing the enable signal ENPO or the start signal.

”Factory setting” column (”FS”)


The factory settings are identified by the abbreviation FS. The following
lists and tables contain all parameters up to user level 01-MODE = 4 in
their factory setting (152-ASTER = DRV_1).

Application Manual CDA3000 5-2


5 Software functions

”Setting” and “No.” columns


The abbreviation for the settings in the DRIVEMANAGER and the KEYPAD
KP200 are entered under “Setting”. In the “No.” column the setting is dis- 1
played as a digit for bus operation.

Types of parameters 2
The software of the inverter module differentiates between different types
of parameters which are marked by symbols in the parameter editor of
the DRIVEMANAGER : 3
• Parameters dependent on the existing hardware.
− These are automatically detected by the inverter
module and their parameters set accordingly. 4
• Parameters dependent on the specific application. .
− These must be entered accordingly by the user.
− In the parameter editor of the DRIVEMANAGER
editable parameters are identified by this symbol.
5

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-3
5 Software functions

5.1 _15FC-First
Function Application
commissioning
• Input of the characteristic motor data • Quick and easy commissioning of
• Selection and activation of the the inverter module
application data set with the preset • Automatic setup of all controllers
solutions • Identification of the connected motor
• Controller auto-tuning

Note: The initial commissioning process is described in the operating


instructions and in section 3.5.

First commissioning parameters

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


150-SAVE Back-up device setup STOP/START ✔
151-ASTPR Original device preset DRV_1 ... M-S_4 DRV_1
OFF ... M-S_4
152-ASTER Preset (ADS) DRV_1
see 4.1
154-MOPNM Motor rated power * * kW
155-MOVNM Motor rated voltage * * V
156-MOFN Motor rated frequency 0.1 ... 1000 50 Hz
157-MOSNM Nominal speed 0 ... 100000 * rpm
158-MOCNM Motor rated current * * A
159-MOCOS Motor cosϕ 0 ... 1 1
see Table
160-MOJNM Mass moment of inertia of the motor 0 ... 100
5.2
CDS1: Mass moment of inertia of the
161-SCJ1 0 ... 1000 0
system
CDS2: Mass moment of inertia of the
162-SCJ2 0 ... 1000 0
system
163-ENSC Enable auto-tuning STOP/START STOP
164-UDSWR Back-up device setup in a user data set 1 ... 4 1 ✔
165-UDSAC Activate user data set 1 ... 4 1
Control location for switchover of the
166-UDSSL see Table 5.8 PARAM ✔
active user data set
167-SCPRO Auto-tuning progress indicator 0 ... 100 0 %
Current open-loop/closed-loop control
300-CFCON see Table 5.4 VFC
mode of the device
Table 5.1 Parameters of subject area _15FC First commissioning

Application Manual CDA3000 5-4


5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

• Parameter values resulting from the size of the current inverter 1


module are assigned an asterisk (*) in the “Value range” and “Fac-
tory setting” columns.

2
Back-up device setup
With the setting 150-SAVE = START the device setup is stored in the
active user data set. 3
During the save operation the parameter value START is displayed; it
does not switch to STOP until the operation has been completed
successfully.
4
Setting of application data set
With selection of the application data set the framework parameters of the 5
areas are set. A specific adaptation to various preset solutions is made
with parameter 152-ASTER.
When a parameter of an application data set is changed, the assistance
parameter 152-ASTER is automatically set to OFF. Parameter 6
151-ASTPR for the active application data set retains its setting.
For an explanation of assistance parameter 152-ASTER refer to section 4
“Preset solutions”. 7
Setting: Mass moment of inertia of motor
The mass moment of inertia of the motor must be entered under parame- A
ter 160-MOJNM in order to ensure optimum running in control mode SFC/
FOR.
If no mass moment of inertia is entered (160-MOJNR=0), a mass moment
of inertia matching an IEC standard motor is defined based on the motor
data.
The basis is the table presented below for a 6-pole asynchronous motor.
The mass moment of inertia of the motor is dependent on the number of
pole pairs and the related rotor design. Consequently, the table values are
approximated taking account of the number of pole pairs.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-5
5 Software functions

Mass moments of inertia of standard three-phase a.c. motors


with squirrel-cage rotor to DIN VDE 0530, 1000 rpm, 6-pole, 50 Hz
and internally cooled, stored in the CDA3000:

Power P [kW] Mass moment of inertia JM [kgm]

0.09 0.00031
0.12 0.00042
0.18 0.00042
0.25 0.0012
0.37 0.0022
0.55 0.0028
0.75 0.0037
1.1 0.0050
1.5 0.010
2.2 0.018
3.0 0.031
4.0 0.038
5.5 0.045
7.5 0.093
11 0.127
13 0.168
15 0.192
20 0.281
22 0.324
30 0.736
37 1.01
45 1.48
55 1.78
75 2.36
90 3.08

Table 5.2 Base value for the mass moment of inertia stored in the
inverter module, referred to a six-pole IEC standard motor

Setting: Mass moment of inertia of system


The mass moment of inertia of the system must be entered under para-
meters 160-SCJ1 (DS1) and 162-SCJ2 (DS2) in order to ensure optimum
running in control mode SFC/FOR.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-6


5 Software functions

If no mass moment of inertia for the system is specified, a 1:1 moment


adjustment is assumed and the mass moment of inertia of the system is
set the same as that of the motor. 1
Reduction of the mass moment of inertia of the system
2
n1 n2
M
3~
3
JM Jred i J2

J2 J2 4
Jred = =
i2 n1 2
n2( )
5
JM = Mass moment of inertia of the motor (MOJNM)
Jred = Reduced mass moment of inertia of the system (SCJx)

6
Above a ratio of 1:5 (JM : Jred) the controllers provide no beneficial control
for SFC and FOR by not adapting the mass moments of inertia to the fac-
tory setting.
7

Note: Specification of the mass moments of inertia is of significance for


control modes SFC and FOR. Based on the mass moments of A
inertia the speed controllers are also set (see section 6.2 “Sensor-
less Flux Control” and 6.3 “Field-Oriented Regulation”).

Activation of auto-tuning
The START value of parameter 163-ENSC activates auto-tuning of the
inverter module. In auto-tuning the motor is identified and its characteri-
stic values are automatically entered in the “Motor data” subject area.
Additionally, the parameters of all controllers are attuned to the motor.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-7
5 Software functions

During auto-tuning the parameter value START is displayed; it does not


switch to STOP until auto-tuning has been completed successfully. In the
final phase of the auto-tuning process the obtained values are stored in
the active user data set.
The data from the motor rating plate must be entered before auto-tuning
is activated.

Setting of the user data set (UDS)


Customer/user settings are stored in one of the four possible user data
sets.
The user data set is selected by way of parameter 164-UDSWR and then
the parameter settings in the RAM are stored as a complete user data
set.
A user data set can be activated by way of parameter 165-UDSAC. The
active user data set is displayed as the parameter value.
Switching between UDS: The control location for activation of a user data
set is defined with parameter 166-UDSSL.

Settings for 166-UDSSL to switch active user data set

Setting
Function
UDSSL
PARAM Switchover by direct editing of the parameter

Switchover by input with function selector setting UM0 (significance 20) or


TERM
UM1 (significance 21)
SIO Switchover by SIO control word
OPTN1 Switchover by control word from option module to slot 1
OPTN2 Switchover by control word from option module to slot 2

Table 5.3 Settings for switchover of the active user data set
with 166-UDSSL

The user data set cannot be switched online. The relevant data set
must be loaded before the inverter module is started.

Note: For more information on the data structure see section 3.1.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-8


5 Software functions

Current open-loop/closed-loop control modes

No.
Setting
CFCON
Function Reference 1
Controlled operation based on an adjustable
0 VFC Section 6.1
V/F characteristic
Sensorless Flux Control with overlaid current 2
1 SFC Section 6.2
control
Encoder-controlled speed control (Field-Oriented
2 FOR Section 6.3
Regulation)
3
Table 5.4 Settings via 300-CFCON

Note: Closed-loop control modes SFC and FOR require an asynchro-


nous motor. Synchronous or reluctance motors are only suppor-
4
ted in open-loop control mode VFC.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-9
5 Software functions

5.2 Inputs and Each input and output of the inverter module has a parameter which
outputs assigns it a function. These parameters are termed “function selectors”
and are located in the relevant subject areas of the inputs and outputs.
The reference structure and the control location additionally have an influ-
ence on the function of the inputs and outputs. Presets are already
entered in the application data sets.

For information on the hardware of the inputs and outputs refer to the sec-
tion headed “Inverter module CDA3000” and the Operation Manual.

5.2.1 _18IA-Analog Function Effect


inputs
• Definition of the internal • Conditioning and filtering of
processing of the analog the analog reference input or
input signals use as a digital input

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)


FISAx AFILx IADBx FPMXx RF1FA
DBSLx FPMNx
FPMX0
FPMN0

(6)

ISA0x
(7)

(1) Analog reference input or use as a digital input


(2) Input filter for fault isolation from 0 to 64 ms
(3) Backlash function for fault isolation around zero
(4) Scaling of the analog input
(5) Scaling factor [%], see section 5.2.6 “Reference structure”
(6) Analog value
(7) Digital value
x Number of the input
y Number of the characteristic data set (CDS)
Figure 5.1 Function block for adaptation of the analog inputs

Application Manual CDA3000 5-10


5 Software functions

Configuration options, ISA0x


FPMAX FPMAX
1
f FISAx = 1, 3 f

FPMIN

-10 V / FNMIN +10 V / -10 V / +10 V /


2
-20 mA +20 mA -20 mA +20 mA

IADBx = 0 ... 100 %


(100% = 10 V/20 mA)

FNMAX FNMAX
3
ISA0x ISA0x

Fig. 5.2 Scaling in unipolar Fig. 5.3 Backlash function in


operation bipolar operation
4
Parameters for analog inputs ISA0x

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


5
180-FISA0 Function selector analog standard input
see Table 5.6 OFF
ISA00
181-FISA1 Function selector analog standard input
see Table 5.6 OFF
6
ISA01
182-F0PX1 CDS1: Maximum value ISA00 at +10V -1600 ... 1600 50 Hz
183-F0PN1
184-F0NX1
CDS1: Minimum value ISA00 at +0V
CDS1: Maximum value ISA00 at -10V
-1600 ... 1600
-1600 ... 1600
0
0
Hz
Hz
7
185-F0NN1 CDS1: Minimum value ISA00 at -0V -1600 ... 1600 0 Hz
186-F1PX1 CDS1: Maximum value ISA01 at +10V -1600 ... 1600 50 Hz
187-F1PN1 CDS1: Minimum value ISA01 at +0V -1600 ... 1600 0 Hz
A
188-AFIL0 Filter time constant for analog channel ISA00 (2x), x = 0 ... 6 3 ✔

189-AFIL1 Filter time constant for analog channel ISA01 (2x), x = 0 ... 6 3 ✔

190-F0PX2 CDS2: Maximum value ISA00 at +10V -1600 ... 1600 50 Hz


191-F0PN2 CDS2: Minimum value ISA00 at +0V -1600 ... 1600 0 Hz
194-F0NX2 CDS2: Maximum value ISA00 at -10V -1600 ... 1600 0 Hz
195-F0NN2 CDS2: Minimum value ISA00 at -0V -1600 ... 1600 0 Hz
196-F1PX2 CDS2: Maximum value ISA01 at +10V -1600 ... 1600 50 Hz
197-F1PN2 CDS2: Minimum value ISA01 at +0V -1600 ... 1600 0 Hz
192-IADB0 ISA00 play range, 100% corresponds 10 V 0 ... 90 0.00 %
193-IADB1 ISA01 play range, 100% corresponds 10 V 0 ... 90 0.00 %

Table 5.5 Parameters from subject area _18IA Analog inputs

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-11
5 Software functions

Settings for 180-FISA0 and 181-FISA1 analog inputs

180- 181-
No. Setting Function
FISA0 FISA1
0 OFF Input off ✔ ✔
1 STR Start enable clockwise ✔ ✔
2 STL Start enable counter-clockwise ✔ ✔
3 INV Invert reference (reverse direction) ✔ ✔
4 /STOP Trigger stop ramp ✔ ✔
5 SADD1 Adjust reference selector 280-RSSL1 by
✔ ✔
value 289-SADD1
6 SADD2 Adjust reference selector 281-RSSL2 by
✔ ✔
value 290-SADD2
7 E-EXT Trigger error ✔ ✔
8 RSERR Reset error ✔ ✔
9 MP-UP MOP, increase reference value ✔ ✔
10 MP-DN MOP, decrease reference value ✔ ✔
11 CUSEL Characteristic data set switchover (CDS) ✔ ✔
12 FFTB0 Fixed frequency selection
✔ ✔
(significance 20)
13 FFTB1 Fixed frequency selection
✔ ✔
(significance 21)
14 FFTB2 Fixed frequency selection
✔ ✔
(significance 22)
15 UM0 User mode selection (significance 20) ✔ ✔

16 UM1 User mode selection (significance 21) ✔ ✔

17 /LCW Limit switch clockwise ✔ ✔


18 /LCCW Limit switch counter-clockwise ✔ ✔
19 SIO Readable via SIO status word ✔ ✔
20 OPTN1 Available to option module at slot 1 ✔ ✔
21 OPTN2 Available to option module at slot 2 ✔ ✔
22 USER0 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔
23 USER1 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔
24 USER2 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔
25 USER3 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔
26 MAN Manual mode ✔ ✔
29 0-10V Voltage input 0-10V ✔ ✔
30 SCALE Limitation of motor current ✔

Table 5.6 Settings for analog inputs

Application Manual CDA3000 5-12


5 Software functions

180- 181-
No. Setting Function
FISA0 FISA1
31 PM10V Voltage input -10V ... +10V ✔
1
32 0-20 Current input 0 ... 20mA ✔
33 4-20 Current input 4 ... 20mA ✔

Table 5.6 Settings for analog inputs


2

Explanatory notes
3
• The settings STR to MAN of the function selectors evaluate the
input as a digital input (24V digital input, PLC-compatible to
IEC1131-2).
• Wire-break monitoring: In setting 4-20 the system status monitor
4
triggers an error as soon as the current at the input (ISA00 only)
falls below 4 mA.

5
Note: When the analog input is used as a digital input, the notes regar-
ding the isolation concept must be observed (see “Isolation con-
cept”).
6
The response of the CDA3000 inverter module to the reference value 0Hz
can be set in the driving profile generator subject area by parameter
597-RF0. 7

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-13
5 Software functions

5.2.2 _200A-Analog
Function Effect
output
• Definition of which scaled • Conditioning and filtering of
actual value is delivered at the analog actual value
the analog output (0 ... 10V) • The analog output provides
diagnosis by way of a volt-
meter if no DRIVEMANAGER
with digital scope is
available.

(1) (2) (3)

FOSA0 OAFI0 OAMX0


OAMN0

OSA00
(4)

(1) Selection of the analog actual value


(2) Output filter for fault isolation from 0 to 64 ms
(3) Scaling of the analog output
(4) Actual
Fig. 5.4 Function block for adaptation of the analog output

Configuration options, OSA00

10 V

U [V]

OAMIO

0% (1) OAMAO

(1) Output variable, e.g. frequency


Fig. 5.5 Scaling of the analog output.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-14


5 Software functions

Parameters for analog output

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


1
200-FOSA0 Function selector analog standard output
see Table 5.8 ACTF
OSA00
201-OAMN0 Minimum value for analog output OSA00 -200 ... 200 0 %
202-OAMX0 Maximum value for analog output OSA00 -200 ... 200 100 % 2
203-OAFI0 Filter time constant for analog channel OSA00 (2x), x = 0 ... 6 4
204-TSCL Torque scaling value *, see Table 5.9 * Nm

Table 5.7 Parameters from subject area _20OA Analog output


3
Explanatory notes

• For the two vertices (0 V, 10 V) the actual value can be adapted in 4


the range from - 200 % to + 200 % relative to a referenced value.

Settings for 200-FOSA0 5


No. Setting Function Referenced value
0 OFF Output off 6
1 ACTF Current actual frequency; exception: in
open-loop control mode VFC the current FMAX
reference frequency is displayed.
2 ACTN Current actual speed nN 7
3 APCUR Apparent current 2*IN
4 ACCUR Active current 2*IN
5 ISA0 Voltage or current at analog input ISA00 10 V / 20 mA A
6 ISA1 Voltage at analog input ISA01 10 V
7 MTEMP Motor temperature
200 °C
(with linear evaluation)
8 KTEMP Heat sink temperature 200 °C
9 DTEMP Interior temperature 200 °C
10 DCV DC-link voltage 500 V / 1000 V 1)
11 VMOT Motor voltage 500 V / 1000 V 1)
12 PS Apparent power 2*PN
13 PW Active power 2*PN
14 ACTT Current actual torque dependent on device

Table 5.8 Settings for 200-FOSA0 analog output


1) 500 V in CDA32xxx, 1000 V in CDA34xxx
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-15
5 Software functions

Device-dependent torques for scaling (204-TSCL)

Torque for scaling


Power
Device type Value range for BV
[kW]
204-TSCL [Nm]
CDA32.003 0.375 5
CDA32.004 0.75 10.2
CDA32.006 1.1 15
CDA32.008 1.5 20
CDA34.003 0.75 10.2
CDA34.005 1.5 20
CDA34.006 2.2 30
CDA34.008 3 40
CDA34.010 4 54
CDA34.014 5.5 72
0.05 ... 200 % of BV
CDA34.017 7.5 98
CDA34.024 11 144
CDA34.032 15 196
CDA34.045 22 288
CDA34.060 30 392
CDA34.072 37 480
CDA34.090 45 584
CDA34.110 55 712
CDA34.143 75 968
CDA34.170 90 1162

Table 5.9 Torque scaling values for different device power classes
BV Device-dependent base value

Application Manual CDA3000 5-16


5 Software functions

5.2.3 _21ID-Digital
Function Effect
inputs
• The function selectors • Free function assignment of 1
determine the function of the all digital inputs
digital inputs.

2
(1)

FIS0x
FIE0x
FISAx 3
ISD0x FIFx
ISE0x
ISA0x
IFx
(2)
4
(1) Selection of function of digital input
(2) Digital value
5
Fig. 5.6 Function block for adaptation of the digital inputs

Parameters for digital inputs 6


Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online
210-FIS00 Function selector digital standard input ISD00 see Table 5.11 STR ✔
211-FIS01 Function selector digital standard input ISD01 -”- STL ✔ 7
212-FIS02 Function selector digital standard input ISD02 -”- SADD-1
213-FIS03 Function selector digital standard input ISD03 -”- OFF
214-FIE00 Function selector digital input of user module
-”- OFF ✔
A
IED00
215-FIE01 Function selector digital input of user module
-”- OFF ✔
IED01
216-FIE02 Function selector digital input of user module
-”- OFF ✔
IED02
217-FIE03 Function selector digital input of user module
-”- OFF ✔
IED03
218-FIE04 Function selector digital input of user module
-”- OFF ✔
IED04
219-FIE05 Function selector digital input of user module
-”- OFF ✔
IED05
220-FIE06 Function selector digital input of user module
-”- OFF ✔
IED06
Table 5.10 Parameters from subject area _21ID Digital inputs
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-17
5 Software functions

221-FIE07 Function selector digital input of user module


-”- OFF ✔
IED07
222-FIF0 Function selector virtual digital fixed input 0 -”- OFF ✔
223-FIF1 Function selector virtual digital fixed input 1 -”- OFF ✔

Table 5.10 Parameters from subject area _21ID Digital inputs

Explanatory notes

• The analog inputs ISA00 and ISA01 can also be assigned digital
functions (see section 5.2.1).
• Selectors FIF0 and FIF1 provide two virtual inputs with the fixed
value 1 (High level). They can be used in place of a permanently
active switch.

Settings for FIS00 ... 214-FIE00 ... 223-FIF1

F F F F F
F
I I I I I
I
No. Setting Function S S S S E
F
0 0 0 0 0
x
0 1 2 3 x
0 OFF Input off ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
1 STR Start enable clockwise ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
2 STL Start enable counter-clockwise ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
3 INV Invert reference (reverse direction) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
4 /STOP Trigger stop ramp ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
5 SADD1 Adjust reference selector 280-RSSL1 by
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
value 289-SADD1
6 SADD2 Adjust reference selector 28-RSSL2 by
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
value 290-SADD2
7 E-EXT Trigger error ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
8 RSERR Reset error ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
9 MP-UP MOP, increase reference value ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
10 MP-DN MOP, decrease reference value ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
11 CUSEL Characteristic data set switchover
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
(CDS)
12 FFTB0 Fixed frequency selection
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
(significance 20)
13 FFTB1 Fixed frequency selection
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
(significance 21)
Table 5.11 Settings of the function selectors

Application Manual CDA3000 5-18


5 Software functions

F F F F F
F
I I I I I
No. Setting Function S S S S E
I
F
1
0 0 0 0 0
x
0 1 2 3 x
14 FFTB2 Fixed frequency selection
(significance 22)
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 2
15 UM0 User mode selection (significance 20) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

16 UM1 User mode selection (significance 21) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

17 /LCW Limit switch clockwise ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔


3
18 /LCCW Limit switch counter-clockwise ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
19 SIO Readable via SIO status word ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
20 OPTN1 Available to option module at slot 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 4
21 OPTN2 Available to option module at slot 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
22 USER0 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
23 USER1 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 5
24 USER2 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
25 USER3 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
26 MAN Manual mode with control via bus
(setup and emergency operation mode)
✔ ✔ ✔ 6
27 ENC Encoder input ✔ ✔
28 FMSI Input for fast reference coupling

(Master/Slave operation) 7
34 INCLK Reference input via clock input ✔

Table 5.11 Settings of the function selectors


A
Explanatory notes

• In closed-loop control mode “FOR” an encoder with HTL signal is


connected at inputs ISD02 and ISD03. Input ISD02 is assigned
track A and ISD03 track B.
• If input ISD01 is assigned the function FMSI (fast reference
coupling), the digital output OSD01 cannot be used.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-19
5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

• The “MAN” function permits a device configured for bus operation to


be operated by the operator locally, e.g. from the switch cabinet.
This function can be used for system setup or emergency operation
mode.
By the “MAN” function the parameters are automatically assigned
new parameter values, as set out in Table 5.12.

Action Function Parameter


Control location Terminals 260-CLSEL = TERM
Input ISD00 Start clockwise 210-FIS00 = STR
Input ISD01 Start counter-clockwise 211-FIS01 = STL
Reference Analog input 0 276-RSSL1 = FA0
channel 1
Reference Off 277-RSSL2 = FCON
channel 2
Table 5.12 Changes based on activation of the input with the MAN
function

Application Manual CDA3000 5-20


5 Software functions

5.2.4 _24OD-Digital
Function Effect
outputs
• The function selectors • Free function assignment of 1
determine the function of the all digital outputs
digital outputs.

2
(1)

FOS0x
FOE0x
OSD0x 3
OED0x
(2)

4
(1) Selection of function of digital output
(2) Digital value
Fig. 5.7 Function block for adaptation of the digital outputs
5
Parameters for digital outputs

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online 6


240-FOS00 Function selector digital standard output
see Table 5.14 OFF ✔
OSD00
241-FOS01 Function selector digital standard output
OSD01
-”- OFF ✔ 7
242-FOS02 Function selector digital standard output
-”- OFF ✔
OSD02 (changeover relay)
243-FOE00 Function selector digital output of user
-”- OFF ✔ A
module OED00
244-FOE01 Function selector digital output of user
-”- OFF ✔
module OED01
245-FOE02 Function selector digital output of user
-”- OFF ✔
module OED02
246-FOE03 Function selector digital output of user
-”- OFF ✔
module OED03
Table 5.13 Parameters from subject area _24OD Digital outputs

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-21
5 Software functions

Settings for 240-FOS00, ... 246-FOE03

F F F F
O O O O
No. Setting Function S S S E
0 0 0 0
0 1 2 x
0 OFF Output off ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
1 ERR Device in error state ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
2 WARN Collective warning message ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
3 /ERR Device not in error state ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
4 /WARN No collective warning message
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
(inverted)
5 ACTIV Power stage active ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
6 ROT_R Motor running clockwise ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
7 ROT_L Motor running counter-clockwise ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
8 ROT_0 Motor in standstill window (f=0Hz) ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
9 LIMIT Reference limitation active ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
10 REF Reference reached ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
11 SIO Set output via serial interface ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
12 OPTN1 Set output via option at slot 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
13 OPTN2 Set output via option at slot 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
14 BRK1 Output is set if the actual speed has
exceeded the value in parameter
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
FBCxx (clockwise: FBCW, counter-
clockwise: FBCCW)
15 BRK2 Output is set if the actual speed has
exceeded the value in parameter
FBCxx and current is flowing in all ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
motor phases (clockwise: FBCW,
counter-clockwise: FBCCW)
16 WUV Warning message when the DC-link
voltage has fallen below the value in ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
parameter WLUV
17 WOV Warning message when the DC-link
voltage has exceeded the value in ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
parameter WLOV
18 WIIT Warning message when I2*t integra- ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
tor of device is active
19 WOTM Warning message when motor
temperature has exceeded value in ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
parameter WLTM
Table 5.14 Settings for function selector FOxxx of the digital outputs

Application Manual CDA3000 5-22


5 Software functions

F F F F
O O O O
No. Setting Function S S S E 1
0 0 0 0
0 1 2 x
20 WOTI Warning message when heat sink
temperature has exceeded value in ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ 2
parameter WLTI
21 WOTD Warning message when interior
temperature has exceeded value in ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
parameter WLTD 3
22 WIS Warning message when apparent
current has exceeded value in para- ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
meter WLIS
23 WFOUT Warning message when output
4
frequency has exceeded value in ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
parameter WLF
24 WFDIG Warning message from slave when
reference value from master is faulty ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
5
in Master/Slave operation
25 WIT Warning message when Ixt integrator
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
of motor is active 6
26 S_RDY Device ready to start ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
27 C_RDY Control ready to start ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
28
29
DCV
USER0
DC-link buffering
Reserved for modified software








7
30 USER1 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
31 USER2 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
32 USER3 Reserved for modified software ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
A
33 FMSO Fast reference coupling (Master/Slave

operation)
34 OCLK Clock output for reference input ✔

Table 5.14 Settings for function selector FOxxx of the digital outputs

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-23
5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

• The warning messages are not displayed in the DRIVEMANAGER.


They can be evaluated in bit-coded form in parameter 120-WRN.
• Parameters can be set for warning limits in subject area _50WA-
Warning messages (section 5.3.9).

5.2.5 _25CK-Clock Function Effect


input/Clock out-
• Definition of the internal • The reference value can be
put
processing of the clock input set by way of a clock fre-
• Scaling of the output quency
frequency of the clock output • The actual value is mapped
onto a clock signal at
OSD01

FFMXx
f[Hz]
1600

FFMNx
-1600
0 kHz F[kHz] 10 kHz

Fig. 5.8 Scaling of clock input ISD01

Application Manual CDA3000 5-24


5 Software functions

Parameters for clock input/clock output

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online 1


250-OCLK Multiplier for clock output OSD01 1, 2, 4 ... 128 1
CDS1: Maximum value of clock input ISD01
251-FFMX1 -1600 ... 1600 50 Hz
at 10 kHz 2
252-FFMN1 CDS1: Minimum value of clock input ISD01 at 0 kHz -1600 ... 1600 0 Hz
253-FFMX2 CDS2: Maximum value of clock input ISD01 at 10 Hz -1600 ... 1600 50 Hz
254-FFMN2 CDS2: Minimum value of clock input ISD01 at 0 kHz -1600 ... 1600 0 Hz 3
255-INCLF Filter time constant for the clock input 0.002-20 0.01 s

Table 5.15 Parameters of subject area _25Ck Clock input/clock output


4
Explanatory notes

• By way of the digital input ISD01, the reference value of the device
can be set with a clock signal. 5
• A clock signal proportional to the output frequency of the device can
be delivered at OSD01. The transmission ratio is adjustable in 2n-
increments from 1 to 128 and the switching frequency of the power
stage (parameter 690-PMFS) is limited.
6

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-25
5 Software functions

5.2.6 _28RS-Refe-
Function Effect
rence structure
• By way of the reference • The reference structure is
structure the two reference adjusted to the application by
channels are added toge- the assistance parameters
ther. Each channel can draw such that no adaptation is
a reference source from a required for most applica-
predefined selection. tions.
• For special requirements, the
internal processing of the
reference value can be
adapted by way of the
flexible reference structure.

Note: This section is intended only for users who are unable to find their
drive solution, or any suggested solution, in the preset application
data sets.

Explanatory notes to Fig. 5.9

1. Reference channels: Reference selectors (B) RSSL1 and RSSL2


switch a reference source (A) onto the reference channel.
The selectors can additionally be switched by digital inputs.
After reference channel 1 has been influenced by parameter RF1FA
(0 ... 100%) reference channel 2 is added to it. The sum of the two
channels can then also be inverted.
At various points within the reference structure the current reference
value can be observed by means of parameters REF1 to REF6.
2. Driving profile generator: The driving profile generator consists of
a ramp generator and a smoothing generator (F and G). The ramp
generator can switch in operation between different ramp steepnes-
ses from the two characteristic data sets (651-CDSSL).
Simultaneously setting inputs STR and STL presets the reference
0 Hz for the ramp generator (see also section 5.2.7. and section
5.5.3).
3. Driving sets: The driving sets are activated by setting one of the
reference selectors to FFTB. The ramps TACR0...7 or TDCR0 ... 7
as appropriate are used (see also section 5.5.5).

Application Manual CDA3000 5-26


5 Software functions

Explanatory notes to Fig. 5.9

4. Smoothing time: The filter smooths the beginning and end of the 1
ramp to limit bucking. The acceleration and braking times are each
extended by the smoothing time (0 to 2000 ms).
When the driving sets are used the smoothing time is deactivated.
2
Symbol Meaning

Reference source (input), e.g. with second characteristic data set


3
Reference selector (switch)
4
Mathematical influence

Interim reference values (for display only) 5


Limitation of reference value (upper limit)

Table 5.16 Symbols used in Fig. 5.9 6

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-27
OPTN 2 (X7)
CDSSL

FMAX1/2 B C D
OPTN 1 (X6)
FIS01 FMIN1/2 RSSL1
RF1FA
FIxxx=INV
ISD01 SADD1
FMSI FFIX1/2 %
REF1 * (-1) REF3
TBSEL

+
FIS01 +

Application Manual CDA3000


ISD01 INCLK TACR0..7 RSSL2

FFTB0..7 SADD2
TDCR0..7
REF2
(1)
FOPT2
SIO (LUSTBUS)
FOPT1

FDIG

FISA1 FCLK

ISA01 FSIO

(analog) FA1
FISA0
FA0
ISA00

A FCON=0
(analog)
Reference input block diagram

5-28
TBSEL
RSSLx = FFTB
TACR0..7 TDCR0..7
FISxx or H
5 Software functions

FIExx
ISAxx CDSSL
ISRxx
IEDxx
+ RSSLx = FFTB
MP-UP CDSSL
FPOT ACCR1/2 DECR1/2

+
START
0 Hz
0 Hz
FISxx or J FMAX1/2
FIExx
ISAxx REF4
ISRxx MPSEL REF5 REF6
IEDxx
MP-DN FMIN1/2

E
STPR1/2 JTIME
RSSLx = FFTB
CDSSL G
F
5 Software functions

A Reference sources
B Reference selectors (RSSLx) with offset function (SADDx)
C Reference adjustment, percentage 1
D Possibility of inversion
E Reference limitation (amount only)
F Ramp generator
G Activate/deactivate smoothing (inactive in table FFTB) 2
H Driving profile generator
J MOP function
(1) Table with 8 driving sets, incl. acceleration and braking ramps
Fig. 5.9 Parameters from subject area _28RS Reference structure
3

4
Setting for 280-RSSL1 and 281-RSSL2

Bus KP/DM Function 5


0 FCON Shuts off unused reference channel
1 FA0 Analog reference value of input ISA00 (± 10 V, 0 ... 20mA etc.)
2 FA1 Analog reference value of input ISA01 (0 ... + 10 V) 6
3 FSIO Reference via serial interface
4 FCLK Reference via clock signal 0 ... 10 kHz at ISD01
5 FDIG Reference for Master/Slave operation 7
6 FOPT1 Reference values from option module in slot 1
(User module UM-xxxx)
7 FOPT2 Reference values from option module in slot 2
(Communication module CM-xxxx)
A
8 FFTBx Table with eight fixed frequencies and associated acceleration and
braking ramps; selection of table position via inputs with the FFTBx
function or directly in parameter TBSEL
9 FFIXx Fixed frequency, switchable with characteristic data set switchover
(FFIX1 and FFIX2)
10 FMINx Minimum output frequency, switchable with characteristic data set
switchover (FMIN1 and FMIN2)
11 FMAXx Maximum output frequency, switchable with characteristic data set
switchover (FMAX1 and FMAX2)

Table 5.17 Settings for reference selectors

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-29
5 Software functions

Working with reference selectors RSSLx and offset SADDx


Reference channels 1 and 2 are supplied by the reference sources
depending on the setting of reference selectors 276-RSSL1 and 277-
RSSL2. By adding together the two reference sources, an offset from
reference channel 2 can be added to reference channel 1 for example.
An offset SADDx can be applied to the selectors RSSLx. In this way the
reference selector can be switched between various sources in operation.
The offset can be changed by way of the digital inputs. For this, the
function selectors of the inputs must be configured accordingly to the
parameter value SADDx. The offset consists of a 4-bit data word (here:
0...11) positioned in the relevant parameter 28x-SADDx. The inputs set
the offset for the reference selector with the rising edge and cancel the
offset with the falling edge.

Note: Selector RSSLx can only be switched by a digital input, assigned


the offset SADDx. Several digital inputs with the offset SADDx do
not cause repeated feedforward of selector RSSLx.

Example of reference source switching:

210-FIS00 = SADD1 The digital input ISD00 switches the offset value
of parameter 285-SADD1 on/off
285-SADD1 = 1 The offset value of parameter SADD1 has a step-
width of 1 increment

Application Manual CDA3000 5-30


5 Software functions

If digital input ISD00 is set, reference selector RSSL1 is advanced by the


value “1 increment” from parameter 285-SADD1 (see Fig. 5.10). If there is
a falling edge at input ISD00, the offset is cancelled again, causing the
original reference source to be set.
1

(1) (2)

276-RSSL1 = FA0 210-FIS00 = SADD1


2

(3)

285-SADD1 = 1
3
ISD00

(4) 4
FA1
FA0
FCON = 0
ISD00 = 1
(1) Base value 5
(2) Activate offset
(3) Offset value
(4) Reference value on reference channel
Fig. 5.10 Example: Input ISD00 delivers offset for reference selector
6
RSSL1.
Operation of input ISD00 switches the reference source.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-31
5 Software functions

Procedure for setting reference input


The precondition is the factory setting (FS) in which only the first charac-
teristic data set is active (650-CDSAC = 0). It is advisable always to apply
the following procedure in order to adjust the reference input for your
application:

Step Function Explanation Parameter

Select reference Set the reference selector to the desired 280-RSSL1


1 source reference source (see table: “Explana-
tion of reference sources”).
Define reference Define the reference limits for minimum 301-FMIN1
2
limit and maximum output frequency. 303-FMAX1
Set ramp Enter the acceleration and braking 590-ACCR1
3 generator ramps and any applicable stop ramp. 592-DECR1
594-STPR1
Activate bucking Where appropriate, define the 596-JTIME
limitation smoothing of your driving profile in order
4
to obtain non-bucking transitions bet-
ween the individual ramps.
Reference adjust- Set the parameters for a reference 297-RF1FA
ment adjustment as necessary. This may be a FIxxx=INV
percentage factor by which reference
5 channel 1 is multiplied, or an inversion
of the common reference value from
both reference channels by way of a
function selector.

Table 5.18 Procedure for setting reference input

Parameters of the reference structure

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


280-RSSL1 Reference selector 1 see Table 5.17 FMAX ✔
281-RSSL2 Reference selector 2 see Table 5.17 FCON ✔
282-FA0 Analog reference input ISA00 * 0 Hz ✔
283-FA1 Analog reference input ISA01 * 0 Hz ✔
284-FSIO Reference serial interface * 0 Hz ✔
285-FPOT Reference of MOP * 0 Hz ✔
Digital reference input
286-FDIG * 0 Hz ✔
(reference coupling)
287-FOPT1 Reference value of option slot 1 * 0 Hz ✔
288-FOPT2 Reference value of option slot 2 * 0 Hz ✔

Table 5.19 Parameters from subject area _28RS Reference structure

Application Manual CDA3000 5-32


5 Software functions

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


289-SADD1 Offset value for reference selector 1 0 ... 11 10 ✔
1
290-SADD2 Offset value for reference selector 2 0 ... 11 0 ✔
291-REF1 Reference value of reference channel 1 * Hz ✔
292-REF2 Reference value of reference channel 2 * Hz ✔
293-REF3 Reference before reference limitation * Hz ✔
2
294-REF4 Reference before ramp generator * Hz ✔
295-REF5 Reference before ramp smoothing * Hz ✔
296-REF6 Reference for transfer to control * Hz ✔ 3
297-RF1FA Factor for reference channel 1 0 ... 100 100 %

Table 5.19 Parameters from subject area _28RS Reference structure


4
Explanatory notes

• Parameter values which are produced from calculations and so are


not editable have an asterisk (*) in the “Value range” column. 5
• The offset value for the reference selector is entered as a purely
decimal number.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-33
5 Software functions

5.2.7 _26CL-Control
Function Effect
location
• The control location determi- • Possible control locations
nes the source from which are:
the control commands are - Terminals
given. - KEYPAD KP200 control unit
• Auto-Start after power-up - Serial interface
- Option slot 1 or 2
• Drive starts in Auto-Start
function directly if contact
ENPO is set

CLSEL

TERM
KPAD
SIO (1)
OPTN1
OPTN2

(1) Chosen control location


Fig. 5.11 Function block: Control location selector

Parameters for control location

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


7-AUTO Auto-Start OFF/ON OFF ✔
260-CLSEL Control location selector see Table 5.21 TERM ✔

Table 5.20 Parameters from subject area _26CL Control location

Settings of the control location selector

No. Setting Function


0 TERM Terminals
1 KPAD KEYPAD KP200
2 SIO Serial interface RS232 (Serial Input Output)
3 OPTN1 Option module at slot 1 (User module UM-xxxx)
4 OPTN2 Option module at slot 2 (Communication module CM-xxxx)

Table 5.21 Settings for 260-CLSEL Control location selector

Application Manual CDA3000 5-34


5 Software functions

Terminals
The start command for a direction of rotation can be set by way of the ter-
minals of the inverter module. The start commands determine the direc- 1
tion.
If the reference value has a negative preceding sign the fact is indicated
during starting by an inverted response – that is to say, in response to 2
Start Clockwise the motor shaft rotates counter-clockwise.

STL STR Explanation

STOP, Motor is uncontrolled if stop ramp and DC braking are off. 3


Otherwise the motor decelerates with the programmed stop ramp or
0 0
the preset braking current down to 0 Hz and is then brought to a
standstill with the preset holding current for a variable holding time.
1 0 START counter-clockwise, Acceleration with ACCRx or DECRx 4
0 1 START clockwise, Acceleration with ACCRx or DECRx
BRAKING with DECRx or TDCRx. As soon as the motor reaches 0 Hz
it is brought to a standstill with the preset holding current if the DC 5
holding function is activated. Otherwise the motor is uncontrolled at
1 1
standstill.
The braking process can be interrupted by applying only one start
contact; the motor then accelerates again. 6
0 1
Reverse direction of rotation, overlap time (STL and STR = 1)
1 0 min. 8 ms

Table 5.22 Truth table for control via terminals


7

KEYPAD KP200
A
In the CONTROL menu the KEYPAD takes over complete control over the
inverter. It attunes the control location selector and the reference channel
1 to itself. The second reference channel is shut off.
By way of the KEYPAD control of the inverter can be seized and a refe-
rence value with preceding sign can be set to determine the direction of
rotation.
Parameters for setting and adapting the KEYPAD are located in subject
area _36KP.
For more information on the KEYPAD refer to the separate documentation,
“User Manual DRIVEMANAGER and KEYPAD”.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-35
5 Software functions

Serial interface
To control the inverter module via the serial interface the LUSTBUS
protocol is used. By way of the LUSTBUS protocol the DRIVEMANAGER
accesses the module. Control of the inverter can be seized by way of the
serial interface.
The control location is set to SIO as soon as the “Control device” function
is called up.
At the end of the control window the old setting is restored before the con-
trol function is taken over by the DRIVEMANAGER.

Note: If communication between the inverter module and the


DRIVEMANAGER is interrupted, the setting can no longer be reset
by the DRIVEMANAGER.

Parameters for setup and data exchange of the serial interface are loca-
ted in subject area _55LB.
For more information on control via the serial interface refer to the sepa-
rate documentation, “LUSTBUS protocol”.

Option slots 1 and 2


Activation of the inverter module by way of communication modules can
be handled via the DRIVECOM state machine or the LUST-specific proto-
col.
The control location is set to OPTx.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-36


5 Software functions

5.3 Protection and Protection of the motor and of the CDA3000 inverter module is preset
information depending on the power class of the module. By means of parameter set-
ting the protection can be adapted for special applications and the protec- 1
tion zone made more sensitive. These safety devices are indicated by
warning and error messages. As an aid to setup, conclusions can be
drawn from the current actual values and the display of device capacity
utilization in the form of a peak value memory. 2
A special case is power failure bridging, which can be parameterized in
response to infringement of a minimum voltage at the mains voltage
input.
3

5.3.1 _30OL-Fre-
quency limita- Function Effect 4
tion • Limitation of the output fre- • Setting of maximum and
quency for a characteristic minimum limit frequencies
data set 5
FMAXx

FFIXx 6
f [Hz]
FMINx

7
1
Start
0
10 V
A
0V
FFIX 1
0

t [ms]

Fig. 5.12 Limitation of output frequency

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-37
5 Software functions

Parameters of frequency limitation

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


301-FMIN1 CDS1: Minimum reference frequency 0 ... 1600 0 Hz ✔
302-FMIN2 CDS2: Minimum reference frequency 0 ... 1600 0 Hz ✔
303-FMAX1 CDS1: Maximum reference frequency 0 ... 1600 50 Hz ✔
305-FMAX2 CDS2: Maximum reference frequency 0 ... 1600 50 Hz ✔
306-FMXA1 CDS1: Absolute maximum frequency 0 ... 1600 1600 Hz
307-FMXA2 CDS2: Absolute maximum frequency 0 ... 1600 1600 Hz

Table 5.23 Parameters from subject area _30OL Frequency limitation

Explanatory notes

• CDS = Characteristic data set


• With FMINx ≠ 0 Hz, after starting the output frequency is accelera-
ted from 0 Hz with the ramp ACCRx to FMINx.
• The absolute maximum frequency FMXAx limits the output fre-
quency of control functions, such as slip compensation in
V/F operation.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-38


5 Software functions

5.3.2 _33MO-Motor Function Effect


protection
• Monitoring of motor tempera- The inverter module shuts off the 1
ture by temperature sensors motor with an error message:
(PTC) or by temperature-
• E-OTM, if the motor
sensitive switches and Ixt
temperature exceeds a pro-
monitoring.
grammable limit value. 2
• Both functions are deactiva-
• E-OLM, if the up-integrated
ted in the factory setting.
current time value exceeds
the motor-dependent limit
value for a specific release
3
time.
This function replaces a
motor circuit-breaker.
4
• The inverter module can
deliver a warning message
when the Ixt motor protection
integrator starts. 5

Note: The resistance of the PTC has a value of > 3 kΩ (cf. DIN 41081
and DIN 44082) at the nominal response temperature. 6
PTC evaluation
7
T/˚C

A
max

E-OTM 1
0
t [s]

Fig. 5.13 PTC evaluation operation diagram

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-39
5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

The inverter module shuts off the motor with the error message E-OTM if
the temperature exceeds a limit value.
The following temperature sensors can be used:
• Linear PTC (KTY 84, yellow)
• Threshold PTC (to DIN 44082)
• Klixon

Note: With KTY 84-Evaluation the current motor temperature is dis-


played in parameter 407-MTEMP in °C (actual value/VAL menu).

Ixt monitoring
Ixt monitoring protects the motor against overheating over its entire speed
range. This is important above all for internally cooled motors, since in
lengthy service at low speed the cooling by the fan and the housing is no
longer adequate. When set correctly, this function replaces a motor cir-
cuit-breaker. The characteristic can be adapted to the operating conditi-
ons by way of interpolation points.

IN
IN = 335-MOPCN
Ib fN = 336-MOPFN
I [A] Ib = 331-MOPCB
fb = 333-MOPFB
Ia = 332-MOPCA
Ia

f [Hz]
fb fN

Fig. 5.14 Below the rated frequency fN (or rated current IN) the motor can
be protected by freely programmable current limits
(for explanations of the short names see Table 5.24).

Application Manual CDA3000 5-40


5 Software functions

t/s

1
F=10Hz F=30Hz F=50Hz
390

300

210
2
180
150
120
90
60
30
I
3
0,75 1,0 1,25 1,5 1,75 2,0 IN

Fig. 5.15 Calculation of shutdown time


4
Under high load the Ixt integrator is activated. The shutdown limit is calcu-
lated from 1.5 times the rated current of the motor which can be delivered
for 60s. The mains voltage of 400V or 460V is taken into account in the 5
calculation. When the Ixt integrator starts up a warning message can be
delivered at a digital output. For this, the function selector of the digital
output must be set to the value WIT.
6
Explanatory notes

• Ixt monitoring protects the motor against overheating over its entire
speed range. This is useful for internally cooled motors, because in
lengthy service at low speeds the cooling by the fan may not be 7
adequate.
• The inverter module shuts off the motor with error message E-OLM
if the up-integrated current time value exceeds the motor-depen-
dent limit value for a specific release time.
A
This function replaces a motor circuit-breaker.
• For thermal reasons, the upward integration must be 10 times faster
than the downward integration. Consequently, within a cycle dura-
tion of 10 min. the motor can be run for 60 s with a current of
I = 1.5 x IN (150% overload).

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-41
5 Software functions

Parameters for motor protection

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


330-MOPTC Type of PTC evaluation see Table 5.26 OFF ✔
2nd current interpolation point (Ib) of the motor protec-
331-MOPCB tion characteristic (referred to the max. characteristic 0 ... 100 100 %
current)
1st current interpolation point (Ia) of the motor protec-
332-MOPCA tion characteristic (referred to the max. characteristic 0 ... 100 100 %
current)
2nd frequency interpolation point fb) of the motor pro-
333-MOPFB 0.1 ... 1600 50 Hz
tection characteristic
334-MOTMX Maximum motor temperature 10 ... 250 150 °C ✔
Motor rated current (IN) for motor protection dependent on
335-MOPCN inverter module, IN A
see Table 5.25
336-MOPFN Motor rated frequency (fN) for motor protection 0.1 ... 1000 50 Hz

Table 5.24 Parameters from subject area _33MO Motor protection

Explanatory notes

• To protect the motors the characteristic and operation of the IEC


standard motor should generally conform to the following limit
values:

f = 0 Hz ≈ 30% IN
f = 25 Hz ≈ 80% IN
fN = 50 Hz ≈ 100% IN

For precise data consult the motor manufacturer.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-42


5 Software functions

Settings for 335-MOPCN

Inverter module
Recommended 4-pole IEC Motor rated current for motor 1
standard motor [kW] protection, MOPCN [A]

CDA31004 0.375 4.0


CDA32003 0.375 2.0 2
CDA32004 0.75 3.4
CDA32006 1.1 5.1
CDA32008 1.5 6.5 3
CDA34003 0.75 2.0
CDA34005 1.5 3.8
CDA34006 2.2 5.6 4
CDA34008 3.0 7.5
CDA34010 4.0 9.1
CDA34014 5.5 11.6 5
CDA34017 7.5 16.3
CDA34024 11 23.1
CDA34032 15 31.1 6
CDA34045 22 44.1
CDA34060 30 57.1
CDA34072 37 70.1 7
CDA34090 45 85.1
CDA34110 55 98.1
CDA34143 75 140.1 A
CDA34170 90 168.1

Table 5.25 Motor rated current dependent on inverter module and IEC
standard motor

The following temperature sensors can be set by way of parame-


ter 330-MOPTC:

No. Setting Function

0 OFF Monitoring off


1 KTY Linear PTC (KTY84, yellow)
2 PTC Threshold PTC (to DIN 44082)
3 TSS Klixon (temperature switch as break contact)

Table 5.26 Settings for 330-MOPTC Temperature sensor


DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-43
5 Software functions

Note: The linear PTC evaluation is adapted to a KTY84 with yellow tole-
rance marking, i.e. 100 °C is in the tolerance band 970 ... 1030 Ω.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-44


5 Software functions

5.3.3 Device protec- Function Effect


tion
• Protection of the CDA3000 The inverter module shuts off the 1
inverter module against motor with an error message:
destruction due to overload
• E-OTI, if the device
temperature exceeds a fixed
limit value. 2
• E-OLI, if the up-integrated
current time value exceeds
the inverter module-depen-
dent limit value for a specific
3
release time.
• E-OC in case of short-circuit
or ground fault detection 4
• The inverter module can
deliver a warning message
when the I2xt device protec-
tion integrator starts. 5

The software and hardware of the CDA3000 inverter module autono-


mously monitors and protects the frequency inverter. 6
The power stage protects itself against overheating dependent on
• the heat sink temperature
• the current DC-link voltage
7
• the power stage transistor module used and
• the modulation switching frequency
A
Note: The current heat sink temperature of the inverter module in the
area of the power transistors (KTEMP) and the device interior
temperature (DTEMP) are displayed in °C (actual value/VAL
menu).

Under high load the I2xt integrator is activated. The I2xt monitor protects
the device against permanent overload. The shutdown limit is calculated
from the rated current of the device which can be delivered for 60 s.

Device Shutdown limit


CDA32.003 (0,375 W) ... CDA34.032 (15 kW) 1,8 x rated current
CDA34.045 (22 kW) ... CDA34.170 (90 kW) 1,5 x rated current

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-45
5 Software functions

When the I2 xt integrator starts up a warning message can be delivered at


a digital output. For this, the function selector of the digital output must be
set to the value WIIT.

Short-circuit or ground fault


The hardware of the inverter module detects a short-circuit at the motor
output and shuts down the motor.
A ground fault is detected by measurement of all three phase currents
even when the power stage is deactivated. This means that increased
leakage currents can also be registered.
A short-circuit or a ground fault is detected automatically.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-46


5 Software functions

5.3.4 _34PF-Power
Function Effect
failure bridging
• After a power failure the • A short-time interruption of 1
inverter module is powered the mains voltage merely
by the rotational energy of causes a reduction in motor
the motor. speed, which is restored to
• Function only in conjunction the original level when the 2
with control modes SFC and power is restored.
FOR

3
Attention: The power failure bridging function is allowed to use only in
SFC or FOR control modes! Current-controlled startup is
deactivated.
4
Power failure detection
The power failure is detected in the DC-link voltage (UZK) by infringement
of a parameterizable minimum voltage threshold.
5

UZK
6
PFVON

7
t
toff

PFVON Threshold for detection of power failure


A
toff Time of power failure

Fig. 5.16 Power failure voltage threshold.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-47
5 Software functions

(1) DC-link controlled speed reduction


(regenerative braking)
After detection of a power failure a frequency or phase jump is effected
dependent on motor type, so the motor is immediately switched to rege-
nerative operation. In regenerative operation the braking ramp is automa-
tically set such that the minimum voltage PFVRF is held for as long as
possible. In this, the automatic braking ramp is limited by an active stop
ramp (RSTOP > 0 Hz/s). When the fixed undervoltage shutdown thres-
hold UZKOff is reached the power stage is disabled and the motor runs
down uncontrolled.
(1.1) Setting with restart (PFSEL = 2)
When the power is restored, irrespective of the speed of the motor – that
is, even at motor standstill – the motor is again accelerated by way of the
preset ramps ACCRx and the frequency reference active prior to the
power failure is executed.
(1.2) Setting without restart (PFSEL = 3)
When the power is restored the power stage remains disabled and the
motor continues running down uncontrolled, provided it has not yet come
to a standstill. The motor can be accelerated again with a new controller
enable and start signal.

Parameters for power failure bridging

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


340-PFSEL Power failure bridging selector see Table 5.28 0 ✔
351-PFC Power failure bridging active current
0 ... 200 100 %
reference
354-PFR Power failure bridging deceleration ramp 1 ... 999 999 Hz/s

Table 5.27 Parameters from subject area _34PF Power failure bridging

Power failure bridging selector 340-PFSEL

BUS KP/DM Function

0 OFF Power failure bridging off


1 NOFCT No function
2 RETRN DC-link-controlled speed reduction with restart
3 NORET DC-link-controlled speed reduction without restart
DC-link-controlled speed reduction without limitation of ramp
4 NOLIM
steepness

Table 5.28 Settings for 340-PFSEL

Application Manual CDA3000 5-48


5 Software functions

Toff

1
UZK

(1)
2
PFVON

UZKoff

3
t

f/Hz 4
max.
(1.1) STPRx
ACCRx

t
6
PO 1
0
MU t

7
f/Hz

(1.2) max.
STPRx A

PO 1
0
MU
BR
PO Status of power stage (active/inactive)
MU Motor uncontrolled
BR Regenerative braking
Toff Power failure time
UZK DC-link voltage

Fig. 5.17 Controlled speed reduction

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-49
5 Software functions

(2) DC-link-controlled speed reduction without limitation of ramp


steepness (PFSEL = 4)
(emergency stop in case of power failure)
When a power failure is detected the fastest possible speed reduction is
executed, regulated to the voltage reference. The steepness of the bra-
king ramp is not limited. The motor is braked regeneratively and runs
down uncontrolled when the fixed undervoltage shutdown threshold
UZKOff is reached. When the power is restored the frequency is not auto-
matically increased to the preset frequency reference.

Toff

UZK

PFVON

UZKoff

f/Hz

(2) max.
DECRx

PO 1
0
MU

PO Status of power stage (active/inactive)


MU Motor uncontrolled
BR Regenerative braking
Toff Power failure time
UZK DC-link voltage

Fig. 5.18 Maximum speed reduction

Application Manual CDA3000 5-50


5 Software functions

5.3.5 _36KP-KEYPAD
Function Effect

• Password settings for the • Protection of the inverter 1


user levels module against unauthorized
• Definition of the permanent access
displays • Selection of key actual
values for permanent display
2

3
VAL inactive (Low level)

active (High level)


4
OSD02
OSD01
OSD00
ISD03
ISD02
ISD01
ISD00
ENPO

5
Fig. 5.19 Display for continuous actual value display and bar graph
6
The continuous actual value display and bar graph can be used separa-
tely to display actual values. The bar graph is used for status display of
system values or to view trends of individual actual values. 7
Parameters of the KEYPAD

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online A


360-DISP Continuous actual value display of the KP200 406 ✔
see Table 5.30
361-BARG Bar graph display of the KP200 419 ✔
362-PSW2 Password for user level 2 of the KP200 0 ... 65535 0 ✔
363-PSW3 Password for user level 3 of the KP200 0 ... 65535 0 ✔
364-PSW4 Password for user level 4 of the KP200 0 ... 65535 0 ✔
367-PSWCT Password for the CTRL menu of the KP200 0 ... 65535 0 ✔
Activate/deactivate parameter number display of the
368-PNUM ON / OFF OFF ✔
KP200
369-CTLFA Multiplier of incremental value in CTRL menu of KP200 1 ... 65535 10000 ✔
1-MODE User level of KP200 1 ... 6 1 ✔

Table 5.29 Parameters from subject area _36KP KEYPAD

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-51
5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

• The user levels are presented in detail in section 3.2. By way of


parameter MODE the user level is selected and, where appropriate,
a prompt is delivered for the password, unless deactivated by the
entry 0.
• With parameter CTLFA the exponent of the reference value is set
for control via the CTRL menu of the KP200.

Settings for 360-DISP and 361-BARG

No. Parameter Function DISP BARG


14 14-ACTT Actual torque (SFC and FOR) ✔ ✔
401 401-ACTN Actual speed (FOR) ✔ ✔
404 404-VMOT Output voltage ✔
405 405-DCV DC-link voltage ✔ ✔
400 400-ACTF Current Actual frequency ✔
406 406-REFF Current reference frequency ✔
409 409-ACCUR Effective value of active current ✔ ✔
408 408-APCUR Effective value of apparent current ✔ ✔
428 428-PS Apparent power ✔
429 429-PW Active power ✔
86 86-TSYS System time after power-up ✔
87 87-TOP Inverter operating hours ✔
413 413-ACTOP Power stage operating hours ✔
410 410-IOSTA States of digital inputs and outputs ✔ ✔
416 416-ISA0 Filtered input voltage ISA00 ✔
417 417-ISA1 Filtered input voltage ISA01 ✔
418 418-ISA0I Filtered input current ISA00 ✔
Motor temperature
407 407-MTEMP ✔
with KTY84-Evaluation
425 425-DTEMP Interior temperature ✔ ✔
427 427-KTEMP Heat sink temperature ✔ ✔

Table 5.30 Settings for continuous actual value display and bar graph

Application Manual CDA3000 5-52


5 Software functions

5.3.6 _38TX-Device Function Effect


capacity utiliza-
tion • Display of all information • Optimization of drive 1
of importance for drive configuration
configuration as • Rapid fault rectification
− Peak value memory
− Mean device capacity 2
utilization

(1) (2) (3) 3

4
F/Hz

t/s 5
CDCMX
CACMX

CSTMX
6

t/s

(1) Acceleration 7
(2) Stationary operation
(3) Braking
Fig. 5.20 Peak current value storage for checking of drive dimensioning A
The peak current value memory continuously stores the absolute peak
values in the acceleration, stationary operation and braking phases. Also,
the mean device capacity utilization is calculated by means of a filter time
constant. When the values have been read they can be reset.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-53
5 Software functions

Parameters for device capacity utilization

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


380-CACMX Max. current in acceleration phase
2 x IN device * %
referred to device rated current
381-CDCMX Max. current in braking phase referred to
0 ... 300% IN device * %
device rated current
382-CSTMX Max. current in stationary operation
0 ... 300% IN device * %
referred to device rated current
383-CFCMX Effective value of maximum current 0 ... 300% IN device * A
384-CSCLR Reset peak value storage ACTIV / CLEAR ACTIV ✔
388-CMID Mean device capacity utilization 0 ... 250 % IN device 100 %
389-CMIDF Filter time constant for mean device
1 ... 1000 20 s
capacity utilization
Table 5.31 Parameters from subject area _38TX Device capacity
utilization

Explanatory notes

• Parameter values which are produced from current calculations and


so are not editable have an asterisk (*) in the “Value range” column.
• Peak value storage in the entire subject area _38TX is reset by set-
ting the value 384-CSCLR = CLEAR.
• For display of the mean device capacity utilization via 388-CMID,
the filter time constant 389-CMIDF must be set to a value greater
than five times the cycle duration of the drive.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-54


5 Software functions

5.3.7 _39DD-Device Function Effect


data
• Delivery of all data of the • Unique identification of the 1
inverter module inverter module and the
device software
The device data contain information on the inverter hardware and soft-
ware which should be kept to hand and quoted when calling on telephone 2
support from LUST.

Parameters for device data 3


Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online
89-NAMDS Data set name 0-28 characters - ✔
90-SREV Base standard version of modified
4
*
software
93-KOMP Compatibility class of SMARTCARD *
106-CRIDX Revision index as suffix to revision num-
*
5
ber
127-S_NR Serial number of device *
130-NAME Symbolic device name 0-64 characters - ✔
390-TYPE Inverter type *
6
92-REV Software revision *
394-A_NR Article number of device *
397-CFPNM Device rated current * A 7
Table 5.32 Parameters from subject area _39DD Device data

Explanatory notes A
• Parameter values which are produced from current calculations and
so are not editable have an asterisk (*) in the “Value range” column.
• The symbolic device name is used in device network lists for ease of
identification of the inverter module. The parameter can only be
edited with the DRIVEMANAGER. When a name is issued it is dis-
played ahead of the device designation.
• For ease of identification the complete data set (all four UDS) can
be assigned a name, such as for archiving of machine data sets.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-55
5 Software functions

5.3.8 _VAL-Actual Function Effect


values
• Display of all actual values of • Monitoring of process
importance for diagnosis and variables
monitoring • Rapid diagnosis of faults

Display
Actual values can be displayed in the DRIVEMANAGER (DM), the KEYPAD
KP200 (KP) or by way of the analog output OSA00:

Parameter Function DM KP OSA00 Unit


14-ACCT Actual torque (in SFC or FOR) ✔ ✔ ✔ Nm
86-TSYS System time after power-up in [min.] ✔ ✔ min.
87-TOP Operating hours meter ✔ ✔ h
400-ACTF Current actual frequency ✔ ✔ ✔ Hz
401-ACTN Current actual speed ✔ ✔ ✔ rpm
404-VMOT Output voltage of inverter ✔ ✔ ✔ V
405-DCV DC-link voltage ✔ ✔ ✔ V
406-REFF Current reference frequency ✔ ✔
407-MTEMP Motor temperature in KTY84 evaluation ✔ ✔ °C
408-APCUR Effective value of apparent current ✔ ✔ ✔ A
409-ACCUR Effective value of active current ✔ ✔ ✔ A
413-ACTOP Operating hours of power stage ✔ ✔ h
416-ISA0 Filtered input voltage ISA00 ✔ ✔ ✔ V
417-ISA1 Filtered input voltage ISA01 ✔ ✔ ✔ V
418-ISA0I Filtered input current ISA00 ✔ ✔ ✔ A
419-IOSTA States of digital and analog I/Os ✔ ✔
422-CNTL Control word of system (see handbook for communication module) ✔
423-ERPAR Number of a faulty parameter in the startup phase ✔
425-DTEMP Interior temperature of the inverter module ✔ ✔ ✔ °C
427-KTEMP Heat sink temperature of the inverter module ✔ ✔ ✔ °C
428-PS Apparent power ✔ ✔ ✔ VA
429-PW Active power ✔ ✔ ✔ W

Table 5.33 Parameters from subject area _VAL Actual value parameters

Application Manual CDA3000 5-56


5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

• The actual values can be displayed in the KeyPad KP200 either in 1


the bar graph or as numerical values in the continuous actual value
display.
For more details refer to section 5.3.5 “KEYPAD”.
2
Control word of system (422-CNTL)
The control word of the system provides information on the current control
status, such as Braking, Start Clockwise or Start Counter-clockwise. 3
Details of the current status word of the inverter module should be kept to
hand for quoting when calling on Telephone support from Lust.
The control word contains the control bits for activation of the inverter. In
control via terminal the control bits are set according to the status of the
4
inputs. The parameter is read-only and is used by Lust for support purpo-
ses.
5
Status word of system (419-IOSTA)
The status word can be displayed in hexadecimal form in the KEYPAD and
DRIVEMANAGER or in binary form in the bar graph (KP200): 6
Hexadecimal: Parameter
360-DISP = IOSTA
(1) VAL
(subject area _36KP) 7
DISP = IOSTA

BARG = IOSTA Binary: Parameter 361-


(2)
9876543210 = High = Low
BARG = IOSTA (subject
area _36KP)
A

(1) Actual values in the VAL menu


(2) Binary representation in the bar graph
Fig. 5.21 Representation of states via KEYPAD KP200

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-57
5 Software functions

Status word 419-IOSTA

I/O Function Hex value Bit


ENPO Digital hardware enable input 0001H 0
ISD00 Digital input 0002H 1
ISD01 Digital input 0004H 2
ISD02 Digital input 0008H 3
ISD03 Digital input 0010H 4
OSD00 Digital output 0020H 5
OSD01 Digital output 0040H 6
OSD02 Digital output (relay) 0080H 7
ISA00 Analog input in digital function 0100H 8
ISA01 Analog input in digital function 0200H 9

Table 5.34 Status word IOSTA in subject area VAL

Application Manual CDA3000 5-58


5 Software functions

5.3.9 _50WA-Warning
Function Effect
messages
• When programmable limit • An impending fault in the 1
values are exceeded for drive system is signalled in
various actual values of the good time to the system
inverter module or of the control.
motor a warning is delivered. 2
Warning messages are automatically reset as soon as the cause of the
warning no longer exists. The warning message is sent via the digital out-
puts, and at the same time the actual value to be monitored for the
warning is also defined.
3

Warning messages 4
Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online
120-WRN Status word, warnings 0000 .... FFFF Hex ✔
500-WLTI Device temperature warning threshold 5 ... 100 100 °C ✔ 5
501-WLTD Interior temperature warning threshold 5 ... 80 80 °C ✔
502-WLTM Motor temperature warning threshold 5 ... 250 180 °C ✔
503-WLUV Undervoltage warning threshold 0 ... 800 0 V ✔ 6
504-WLOV Voltage overload warning threshold 0 ... 800 800 V ✔
505-WLF Frequency warning threshold 0 ... 1600 0 Hz ✔
506-WLIS Apparent current warning threshold 0 ... 999.95 999.95 A ✔
7
Table 5.35 Parameters from subject area _50WA Warning messages

Explanatory notes
A
• Any warning can be delivered at any digital output.
• The motor temperature warning (WLTM) indicates a motor over-
load.
• The device temperature warning (WLTI) takes the temperature
value from the sensor on the heat sink on the power stage transis-
tors or, in the case of small inverter modules, directly from the
power stage module.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-59
5 Software functions

• Inadequate or excessive DC-link voltage triggers the undervoltage


(WLUV) or voltage overload (WLOV) warning as appropriate.
• The frequency warning relates to the current output frequency of the
inverter module.
• The status word 120-WRN is formed from the current warning mes-
sages.

The warning messages are not displayed in the DRIVEMANAGER. They can
be evaluated in hexadecimally coded form in parameter 120-WRN (see
section 5.3.9).
A listing of the error and warning messages displayed in the
DRIVEMANAGER is given in the Appendix.

Warning messages are assigned a hysteresis:

Physical variable Hysteresis


Voltages 10 V (± 5 V)
Temperature 5 °C (± 2,5 °C)
Frequency 1 Hz (± 0,5 Hz)
Table 5.36 Hysteresis of warning messages

Status word 120-WRN

Warning Function Hex value Bit

Warning message when the DC-link voltage


WUV has fallen below the value in parameter 0001H 0
WLUV
Warning message when the DC-link voltage
WOV 0002H 1
has exceeded the value in parameter WLOV

Warning message when I2*t integrator of


WIIT 0004H 2
device is active
Warning message when motor temperature
WOTM 0008H 3
has exceeded value in parameter WLTM
Warning message when heat sink tempera-
WOTI 0010H 4
ture has exceeded value in parameter WLTI

Table 5.37 Hexadecimal representation of warning messages

Application Manual CDA3000 5-60


5 Software functions

Warning Function Hex value Bit

WOTD
Warning message when interior tempera-
ture has exceeded value in parameter WLTD.
0020H 5 1
Warning message when apparent current
WIS 0040H 6
has exceeded value in parameter WLIS

WFOUT
Warning message when output frequency
0080H 7
2
has exceeded value in parameter WLF
Warning message from slave when refe-
WFDIG rence value from master is faulty in Master/ 0100H 8
Slave operation 3
Warning message when Ixt integrator of
WIT 0200H 9
motor is active

Table 5.37 Hexadecimal representation of warning messages 4

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-61
5 Software functions

5.3.10_51ER-Error Function Effect


messages
• Display of faults in the drive • Rapid localization of the
system error cause and definition of
the response of the drive to a
fault

Error messages can be detected and evaluated by


way of the status LEDs of the inverter module. If
the red LED H1 is flashing an error has occurred.
The response to an error can be parameterized
according to the cause of the error.

Flash code of KEYPAD


Error cause
red LED H1 display

1x E-CPU CPU errors and other rare errors


2x E-OFF Undervoltage shut-off
3x E-OC Current overload shut-off
4x E-OV Voltage overload shut-off
5x E-OCM Motor overloaded
6x E_OLI Device overloaded
7x E-OTM Motor temperature too high
8x E-OTI Cooling temperature too high

Table 5.38 Error messages

Note: For more error numbers and possible causes refer to the Appen-
dix.

Acknowledgment and resetting of errors


Errors can be acknowledged and reset in various ways:
• Rising edge at digital input ENPO
• Rising edge at a programmable digital input with setting of the
function selector to ERES
• Write value 1 to parameter 74-ERES via control unit or bus system

Application Manual CDA3000 5-62


5 Software functions

Parameters for error messages

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online 1


74-ERES Reset device errors STOP/START STOP ✔
140-R-RNM Response to error in setting an operation
RESET RESET
mode
510-R-SIO Response to SIO watchdog HALT ... RESET HALT ✔
2
511-R-CPU Response to CPU error RESET RESET ✔
512-R-OFF Response to undervoltage HALT ... RESET LOCK ✔
513-R-OC Response to current overload HALT ... RESET LOCK ✔ 3
514-R-OV Response to voltage overload HALT ... RESET LOCK ✔
515-R-OLI Response to Ixt cut-off
HALT ... RESET LOCK ✔
of inverter
4
516-R-OTM Response to motor overheating WRN ... RESET LOCK ✔
517-R-OTI Response to inverter module
HALT ... RESET LOCK ✔
overheating
518-R-SC Response to error during initial
LOCK ... RESET LOCK ✔
5
commissioning
519-R-OLM Response to motor I2xt cut-off HALT ... RESET LOCK ✔

520-R-PLS Response to software runtime error RESET RESET ✔ 6


521-R-PAR Response to faulty parameter list RESET RESET ✔
522-R-FLT Response to floating point error RESET RESET ✔
523-R-PWR
524-R-EXT
Response to unknown power pack
Response to external error message
RESET
HALT ... RESET
RESET
HALT


7
525-R-USR Response to error message in customer
HALT ... RESET HALT ✔
specific software
526-R-OP1 Response to error in option module
HALT ... RESET HALT ✔
A
slot 1
527-R-OP2 Response to error in option module
HALT ... RESET HALT ✔
slot 2
529-R-WBK Response to wire break ISA00
HALT ... RESET HALT ✔
at 4 ... 20mA
530-R-EEP Response to memory error in
RESET RESET
FLASHEPROM
531-EFSCL Ground fault detection response threshold
0 ... 200 0 %
scaling
532-R-PF Response after DC-link buffering HALT ... RESET HALT ✔
533-R-FDG Response to reference coupling
HALT ... RESET HALT
transmission error
534-R-LSW Response limit switches exchanged HALT ... RESET LOCK ✔

Table 5.39 Parameter from subject area _51ER Error messages


DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-63
5 Software functions

94-TERR System time on occurrence of last error 0 ... 65535 0 h


95-ERR1 Last error 0.0 ... 65535 0.0 h
96-ERR2 Second-last error 0.0 ... 65535 0.0 h
97-ERR3 Third-last error 0.0 ... 65535 0.0 h
98-ERR4 Fourth-last error 0.0 ... 65535 0.0 h

Table 5.39 Parameter from subject area _51ER Error messages

Explanatory notes

• The parameters highlighted in gray permit no settings – they are for


display purposes only.

The parameters ERRx store the error time with error number:

Error no.: Exxx


Error time: 0.1 h = 6 min

After every error the error message scrolls and the error parameter
ERR1 indicates the last error.
• With the setting 0% ground fault detection 531-EFSCL is deactiva-
ted. Settings below 10% may lead to shutdowns due to the limited
measurement accuracy of the current.

Settings for 510-R-SIO to 140-RNM

Bus DM/KP Function

0 WRN No response
1 HALT Disable power stage
Disable power stage and secure against restarting
2 LOCK
(prevent autostart)
Disable power stage and reset device after confirmation of
3 RESET
error

Table 5.40 Response to error

Note: A listing of the error and warning messages displayed in the


DRIVEMANAGER is given in the Appendix.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-64


5 Software functions

5.4 Bus operation This Manual details only the software parameters of the CDA3000 inver-
and option ter module. For more details on the field bus systems refer to the relevant
modules documents relating to the option modules. 1

5.4.1 _55LB-LUSTBUS Function Effect 2


• Creation of the device • Adaptation of the serial inter-
addresses and baud rate for face (RS232) to as PC with
the service and diagnostic the DRIVEMANAGER software
interface or the KEYPAD KP200
3

Parameters for LUSTBUS


4
Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online

9600
1200 5
2400
81-SBAUD LUSTBUS transfer rate 4800 57600 Bit/s ✔
19200
2880 6
57600
82-SADDR LUSTBUS device address 0 ... 30 1
83-SDMMY LUSTBUS dummy parameter 0 ... 255 0
84-SWDGT LUSTBUS watchdog time setting 0.00 ... 20.00 0.00 s ✔
7
85-SERR LUSTBUS error status word 00H ... FFH 00 Hex ✔

550-SSTAT Status word of serial interface 0 ... 65535 0 ✔

551-SCNTL Control word of serial interface 0000H ... FFFFH 0000Hex ✔


A
Table 5.41 Parameters from subject area _55LB LUSTBUS

Explanatory notes

• If only one inverter module is operated on the DRIVEMANAGER no


device address need be set. For several devices differing address
parameters must be set.
• The LUSTBUS watchdog time setting is deactivated to 0.0 s at the
factory.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-65
5 Software functions

Note: Where there are several devices on a bus system, to provide a


clearer differentiation between them it is advisable to enter a
symbolic name in each device by way of parameter 130-Name
(see section 5.3.7 “Device data”).

Application Manual CDA3000 5-66


5 Software functions

5.4.2 _57OP-Option Function Effect


modules
• Setting of device addresses • Adaptation of the option 1
and baud rate for the com- modules to the application
munication modules
• Configuration of process
data for the communication 2
modules
• Diagnostic data for field bus
operation
3
An up-to-date overview of the option modules is given in the CDA3000
Catalogue.
4
Overview of option modules
5
Order designation Option modules Brief description

CM-CAN1 CANLust Conforming to CiA Draft Standard 102


CM-CAN2 CANopen Conforming to CiA Draft Standard 301/402 6
CM-DPV1 PROFIBUS-DP Conforming to EN 50170 / DIN 19245
Terminal expansion module with 8 inputs
UM-8I40 I/O module
and 4 outputs 7
Table 5.42 Overview of option modules

Parameters for option modules A


Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online

489-CLBDR CANLUST controller baud rate 25 ... 500 500


492-CACNF CANLust control/reference transfer mode 0 ... 4 2 ✔

570-CAMOD Function selection option module CANLust Slave/Master Slave


571-CLADR CAN bus Device address 0 ... 29 0
572-CASTA Status word CANLUST bus 0000H ... FFFFH 0000 Hex
573-CACTR CAN bus control word 0000H ... FFFFH 0000 Hex ✔

Table 5.43 Parameters from subject area _570P Option modules

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-67
5 Software functions

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online

574 -CAWDG CAN bus watchdog time 0 ... 255 0 ms ✔

575 -CASCY Sampling time for status message 1 ... 32000 80 ms ✔

580 -COADR CANopen device address 1 ... 127 1


581 -COBDR CANopen controller baud rate 25 ... 1000 500
582-CPADR Profibus DP device address 0 ... 127 0

Table 5.43 Parameters from subject area _570P Option modules

Explanatory notes

• All option modules communicate with the CDA3000 inverter module


based on the standard of the CANLust protocol.
• The watchdog monitoring is deactivate to 0 ms at the factory.

CAN system Parameter Values [bit/s]

CANLUST 489-CLBDR 25, 50, 75, 125, 250, 500


CANopen 581-COBDR 25, 125, 500, 1000

Table 5.44 Transmission speed of CAN controller

Application Manual CDA3000 5-68


5 Software functions

5.5 Open-loop and The following software functions are used in both the open-loop and the
closed-loop closed-loop control modes.
control 1
5.5.1 _31MB-Motor
holding brake Function Effect 2
• An electromechanical hol- • The holding brake engages
ding brake can be actuated when a minimum frequency
depending on a limit value limit is infringed. This may
also be configured depen- 3
dent on monitoring of the
motor currents.

The diagram below represents the function of the motor holding brake 4
within the programmable frequency range. The brake can be released by
a digital output set by the function selector.

5
f [Hz]

FBRR 6
0

FBRL
7

A
OSxx

(1) Brake released


Fig. 5.22 Frequency ranges of the holding brake. An output releases the
motor brake within the frequency range -FBRL ... +FBRR

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-69
5 Software functions

Parameters for motor holding brake

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


310-FBCW Frequency limit for motor
0 ... 1600 3 Hz ✔
brake in clockwise running
311-FBCCW Frequency limit for motor
brake in counter-clockwise -1600 ... 0 -3 Hz ✔
running
312-FBHYS Hysteresis for operation point
0 ... 1600 1 Hz ✔
of motor holding brake
Table 5.45 Parameters from subject area _31MB Motor holding brake

Settings of digital outputs for motor holding brake

F F F F
O O O O
Setting Function S S S S
D D D E
0 1 2 x
BRK1 Output is set when the actual speed has
exceeded the value in parameter FBCxx
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
(clockwise: FBCW, counter-clockwise:
FBCCW).
BRK2 Output is set if the actual speed has excee-
ded the value in parameter FBCxx and cur-
rent is flowing in all motor phases ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
(clockwise: FBCW, counter-clockwise:
FBCCW).
Table 5.46 Settings for FOxxx of digital outputs for motor holding brake

Explanatory notes

• The frequency limit for engagement of the holding brake can be set
independently for clockwise and counter-clockwise running. This
enables problem-free operation of lifting applications.
• The optional monitoring of the motor current BRK2 delivers the
security when the holding brake is released that the motor is cor-
rectly connected and has already built up torque.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-70


5 Software functions

5.5.2 _32MP-MOP
Function Effect
function
• With two inputs the reference • Simple adaptation of the 1
can be increased or reduced motor speed to the process
in linear form

2
MPSEL

1
2
FPOT
3
3 (1)
4
5

(1) Active MOP function in reference source FPOT 4


Fig. 5.23 Function block: MOP function selector

Parameters for MOP function 5


Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online
320-MPSEL Configuration for motor
operated potentiometer
0 ... 6 0 ✔ 6
Table 5.47 Parameters from subject area _32MP MOP function

7
Settings for MOP function

BUS DM/KP Function

0 OFF No function A
Increase and reduce speed within the limits FMIN ... FMAX with
1 F1
inputs MP_UP and MP_DN.
Increase and reduce speed within the limits FMIN ... FMAX with
2 F2 inputs MP_UP and MP_DN. If both inputs are set simultane-
ously, the offset speed is reset to 0 Hz.
Increase and reduce speed within the limits FMIN ... FMAX with
3 F3 inputs MP_UP and MP_DN. In case of failure of the mains
voltage the offset speed is stored.

Table 5.48 Settings for 320-MPSEL MOP function

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-71
5 Software functions

BUS DM/KP Function


Increase and reduce speed within the limits FMIN ... FMAX with
inputs MP_UP and MP_DN. If both inputs are set simultane-
4 F4
ously, the offset speed is reset to 0 Hz. In case of failure of the
mains voltage the offset speed is stored.
Increase and reduce speed within the limits FMIN ... FMAX with
5 F5 inputs MP_UP and MP_DN. The offset speed is reset to 0 Hz
when the start command is cancelled.
Increase and reduce speed within the limits FMIN ... FMAX with
inputs MP_UP and MP_DN. If both inputs are set simultane-
6 F6
ously, the offset speed is reset to 0 Hz. The offset speed is
reset to 0 Hz when the start command is cancelled.

Table 5.48 Settings for 320-MPSEL MOP function

Definitions
Base value Analog speed reference set at input ISAxx
Offset Portion of the increase or decrease in the base value, influenced
by the inputs with the functions MP_UP and MP_DN
ISDxx = MP_UP Offset input for reference increase
ISDxx = MP_DN Offset input for reference decrease

Application Manual CDA3000 5-72


5 Software functions

Example: Setting 1 of MOP function


A digital potentiometer is operated by way of two digital inputs. One input
has a decreasing effect on the reference value, the other an increasing 1
effect. At the analog input ISA0x a base value can be set as the analog
speed reference FSIN, so the digital inputs act as an offset. The MOP
function assigns the reference source FPOT a reference value.
2
ACCRx DECRx

n
FMAX 3

Offset 4
FSIN
Offset
Basis
0
t 5

6
(1)
STL S1IND S2IND

(1) Reset reference to base value 7


Fig. 5.24 Basic function with reset to base value (corresponds to setting 1 in
Table 5.48)

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-73
5 Software functions

5.5.3 _59DP-Driving Function Effect


profile generator
• Setting of the acceleration • Adaptation of the motor
and deceleration ramps dynamics to the application
• Setting of a smoothing of the • Reduced drive bucking
the start and end point of the
linear ramp

Driving profile generator


The reference limiter is inserted upstream of the driving profile generator.
By way of the reference selector the reference sources are selected, and
thus indirectly in the driving profile generator the general ramp generator
or table-supported ramp generator. The driving profile generator genera-
tes the appropriate acceleration and deceleration ramps to attain the spe-
cified frequency reference. The braking ramp STPRx is effective throug-
hout the entire driving profile generator if it is activated with STPRx ≠ 0.
• Normal, non-table-supported driving sets (RSSLx ≠ FFTB):
Ramp generator with characteristic data sets, selection of characteri-
stic data set by way of characteristic data selector 650-CDSSL
• Table-supported driving sets (RSSLx = FFTB):
Driving sets from a stored table, selection of data sets by way of
table selector 624-TBSEL

Application Manual CDA3000 5-74


5 Software functions

Driving profile generator block diagram

x
1
ACCR DECR STPR 1
2
CDSSL
x = 1, 2
f [Hz]

2
ACCRx DECRx
STPRx

RSSLy

FMAXx
0 Hz
START

= FFTB
F1
JTIME t [s]
+ 3
(1) REF5
REF4
= FFTB +
FMINx f [Hz]

E
TACRz
STPRx
TDCRz 4
t [s]

TBSEL
z = 0...7
F2 5
z ACCR DECR STPR
0
1
2

F
7
6
E Reference limiter (subject area _30OL frequency limitations)
F Driving profile generator
F1 Ramp generator, normal (Parameters from subject area _59DP Driving 7
profile generatorsee Table 5.50)
F2 Table-supported ramp generator (subject area _60TB driving sets)
(1) Frequency reference
Fig. 5.25 (Parameters in subject area _59DP (cf. reference structure A
Fig. 5.9)

Ramp generator
The ramp generator can smooth linear ramps at the end points in order to
limit bucking.

Movement mode Setting

dynamic JTIME = 0, linear ramps without smoothing


Low impact on mechanism JTIME ≠ 0, sinusoidal ramps based on smoothing by x [ms].

Table 5.49 Ramp generator

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-75
5 Software functions

JTIME

ACCR
DECR
f [Hz]
STPR

t [s]

Fig. 5.26 Driving profile of the normal ramp generator

Sinusoidal ramps
As a result of the bucking limitation the acceleration and deceleration
times are increased by the smoothing time JTIME. An emergency stop
via the stop ramp STPRx is executed in linear mode – that is to say
without bucking limitation – to keep the braking duration as short as pos-
sible.

Note: The mechanism is left heavily vibrated. Material fatigue due to


load changes is reduced. A mechanism with play is subject to less
deflection.

Parameters for the ramp generator

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


590-ACCR1 CDS1: Acceleration ramp 0 ... 999 20 Hz/s
591-ACCR2 CDS2: Acceleration ramp 0 ... 999 20 Hz/s
592-DECR1 CDS1: Deceleration ramp 0 ... 999 20 Hz/s
593-DECR2 CDS2: Deceleration ramp 0 ... 999 20 Hz/s
594-STPR1 CDS1: Stop ramp 0 ... 999 20 Hz/s
595-STPR2 CDS2: Stop ramp 0 ... 999 20 Hz/s
596-JTIME Smoothing time of sinusoidal ramp 0 ... 10000 0 ms
597-RF0 Response at reference value 0 Hz OFF / 0 Hz OFF - ✔

Table 5.50 Parameters from subject area _59DP Driving profile generator

Application Manual CDA3000 5-76


5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

• Deactivation of parameter by the value 0 (zero) 1


• The DC braking function has priority over the stop ramp STPRx.

2
Note: Dynamic acceleration and deceleration results in high startup and
braking currents. This also applies to the emergency stop by way
of the stop ramp. In deceleration the motor falls into regenerative
operation and increases the DC-link voltage (DCV). 3

Error messages in acceleration processes 4


Acceleration Errors Remedy

positive • E-OC (current overload) • Flatter ramp


5
• E-OLI (inverter module • Higher-powered inverter
I 2xt cut-off) module

negative • E-OV (voltage overload) • Flatter ramps


• E-OLI (inverter module • External braking resistor
6
I 2xt cut-off)
• E-OTI (inverter module • Higher-powered inverter
overheating) module 7
Table 5.51 Rectification of errors in acceleration processes

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-77
5 Software functions

5.5.4 _27FF-Fixed fre- Function Effect


quencies
• Setting of a fixed frequency • Operation of a drive in quick
per characteristic data set jog/slow jog driving profile
• Simple reference input

f [Hz]
FMAXx

FFIXx

t [s]

FFIXx

FMAXx

1
STR 0

t [s]
1
STL 0
t [s]
Slow jog
1
S1 0
Quick jog
t [ms] t [s]

Fig. 5.27 Fixed frequency for quick jog/slow jog application

Parameters of the fixed frequencies

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


270-FFIX1 CDS1: Fixed frequency -1000 ... 1000 20 Hz ✔
271-FFIX2 CDS2: Fixed frequency -1000 ... 1000 20 Hz ✔

Table 5.52 Parameters from subject area _27FF Fixed frequencies

Explanatory notes

• The fixed frequency can be selected by way of the digital inputs.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-78


5 Software functions

5.5.5 _60TB-Driving Function Effect


sets
• Setting of up to 8 fixed • Adaptation of the motor 1
frequencies with the dynamics to the application
associated acceleration and
deceleration ramp
2
A driving set contains a fixed frequency, which when the set is selected
serves as the frequency reference, and an acceleration and deceleration
ramp. Up to 8 driving sets can be stored in a table.
3
Initiation of an emergency stop by means of a braking ramp with parame-
ter STPRx≠0 disables the table-supported ramps and activates the bra-
king ramp.
4
Note: Explanation of the driving profile generator in the preceding sec-
tion: 5.5.3 _59DP-Driving profile generator.
5

Example of application of the driving sets


6
Preconditions:

• Function selector of digital input ISD00: FIS00 = FFTB0


• Function selector of digital input ISD01: FIS01 = FFTB1 7

FFTB1
TACR1 A
FFTB0 FFTB0
f [Hz] TDCR2
TACR0 TACR0
FFTB3
0
TDCR3
TACR2

1 FFTB2
S2
0
1
S1 0

Start 1
0

t [ms]

Fig. 5.28 Example of driving sets with fixed frequencies


DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-79
5 Software functions

Selection of driving sets

Driving FIxxx= FIxxx= FIxxx= Fixed Acceleration Deceleration


set FFTB2 FFTB1 FFTB0 frequency ramp ramp
0 0 0 0 FFTB0 TACR0 TDCR0
1 0 0 1 FFTB1 TACR1 TDCR1
2 0 1 0 FFTB2 TACR2 TDCR2
3 0 1 1 FFTB3 TACR3 TDCR3
4 1 0 0 FFTB4 TACR4 TDCR4
5 1 0 1 FFTB5 TACR5 TDCR5
6 1 1 0 FFTB6 TACR6 TDCR6
7 1 1 1 FFTB7 TACR7 TDCR7

Table 5.53 Selection of driving sets

The driving sets (rows in the table) are selected by way of:
• the inputs which are parameterized to switch to FFTBx, or
• the control word in field bus systems

Parameters of the driving sets

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


600-FFTB0 Table frequency 1 -1600 ... 1600 5 Hz ✔
601-FFTB1 Table frequency 2 -1600 ... 1600 10 Hz ✔
602-FFTB2 Table frequency 3 -1600 ... 1600 15 Hz ✔
603-FFTB3 Table frequency 4 -1600 ... 1600 20 Hz ✔
604-FFTB4 Table frequency 5 -1600 ... 1600 25 Hz ✔
605-FFTB5 Table frequency 6 -1600 ... 1600 30 Hz ✔
606-FFTB6 Table frequency 7 -1600 ... 1600 40 Hz ✔
607-FFTB7 Table frequency 8 -1600 ... 1600 50 Hz ✔
608-TACR0 Table acceleration ramp 1 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
609-TACR1 Table acceleration ramp 2 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
610-TACR2 Table acceleration ramp 3 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
611-TACR3 Table acceleration ramp 4 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
612-TACR4 Table acceleration ramp 5 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
613-TACR5 Table acceleration ramp 6 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
614-TACR6 Table acceleration ramp 7 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s

Table 5.54 Parameters from subject area _60TB Driving sets

Application Manual CDA3000 5-80


5 Software functions

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


615-TACR7 Table acceleration ramp 8 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
1
616-TDCR0 Table deceleration ramp 1 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
617-TDCR1 Table deceleration ramp 2 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
618-TDCR2 Table deceleration ramp 3 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
619-TDCR3 Table deceleration ramp 4 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
2
620-TDCR4 Table deceleration ramp 5 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
621-TDCR5 Table deceleration ramp 6 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
622-TDCR6 Table deceleration ramp 6 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s 3
623-TDCR7 Table deceleration ramp 6 0.01 ... 999 20 Hz/s
624-TBSEL Table driving set selector *

Table 5.54 Parameters from subject area _60TB Driving sets 4


Explanatory notes

• Deactivation of parameter by the value 0 (zero) 5


• Parameter values which are produced from current calculations and
so are not editable have an asterisk (*) in the “Value range” column.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-81
5 Software functions

5.5.6 _65CS-Charac- Function Effect


teristic data set
• A switch can be made online • Adaptation of the motor
(CDS)
between two characteristic dynamics to the application
data sets • Operation of two different
motors on one inverter
module

Parameters for characteristic data set switchover

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


650-CDSAC Characteristic data set (CDS) activ see Table 5.54 0
651-CDSSL Control location for switchover of charac-
see Table 5.58 OFF ✔
teristic data set (CDS)
652-FLIM Limit frequency for switchover to CDS -1000 ... 1000 20 Hz ✔

Table 5.55 Parameters from subject area _65CS Characteristic data


switchover

Explanatory notes

• Any application data set may contain a second characteristic data


set.
• An overview of the functional areas containing parameters for the
second characteristic data set is presented by Table 5.56.

Functional areas with characteristic data sets

Subject area Parameter


Reference structure Min., max. and fixed frequency
Driving profile generator Ramps
Current-controlled acceleration All parameters
Voltage frequency control All parameters
IxR load compensation All parameters
Slip compensation All parameters
Current injection All parameters
Magnetizing All parameters
Speed controller SFC All parameters
Speed controller FOR All parameters
Table 5.56 Subject areas with parameters in the second characteristic
data set (CDS)

Application Manual CDA3000 5-82


5 Software functions

Active characteristic data set

Setting
CDSAC
Function 1
0 characteristic data set 1 (CDS!) active
1 Characteristic data set 2 (CDS2) active

Table 5.57 Display for 650-CDSAC


2

Possibilities of characteristic data set switchover


3
Setting
No. Function
CDSSL
OFF No switchover 4
0
• CDS 1 active
FILIM Switchover on exceeding of frequency of value in
1 parameter FILIM
• CDS 2, if frequency > FLIM, otherwise CDS 1
5
TERM Switchover via digital input
2
• CDS 2, if IxDxx = 1, otherwise CDS 1
ROT Switchover on reversal of direction 6
3
• CDS 2, if counter-clockwise, otherwise CDS 1
SIO Switchover via SIO
4
• CDS 2, if control bit set, otherwise CDS 1 7
OPTN1 Switchover via field bus at option slot 1
5
• CDS 2, if control bit set, otherwise CDS 1
OPTN2 Switchover via field bus at option slot 2
6
• CDS 2, if control bit set, otherwise CDS 1
A
Table 5.58 Settings for 651-CDSSL

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-83
5 Software functions

5.5.7 _66MS-Master/ Function Effect


Slave operation
• Speed synchronism of • Determine transmission ratio
several different drives by for reference coupling
setting of the coupling factor
in Master/Slave operation

One inverter module is parameterized as the master. The master passes


the signal for fast reference coupling to up to five inverter modules para-
meterized as slaves.

OSD01 ISD01 ISD01


= i1 = i2 =
(1)
CPU
CPU CPU
FU 0 FU 1 FU 2

n0 n1 = n0 · i1 n2 = n0 · i2

(1) Reference
ix Coupling factor of slave axle, parameter 837-MSFCT

Fig. 5.29 Fast reference coupling via Master/Slave operation

Function Parameter setting of the function selector Terminal

Signal: X2-16
Master Digital output OSD01: FOS01 = FMSO
Dig. ground: X2-17
Signal: X2-10
Slave Digital input ISD01: FIS01 = FMSI
Uaux 24V: X2-13

Table 5.59 Setting instructions

Application Manual CDA3000 5-84


5 Software functions

Parameters for Master/Slave operation

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


1
Coupling factor for Master/Slave
837-MSFCT 0.0 ... 1000, 000 1 ✔
operation
Error trigger time in case of failure of
838-MSECT
reference master
0 ... 65535 0 ms ✔
2
Table 5.60 Parameters from subject area _66MS Master/Slave operation

Explanatory notes 3
• A maximum of 6 devices can be interlinked.
• In the event of failure of the reference input from the master, or if the
reference signal checksum is faulty, the slave inverter responds
after the set time in parameter 838-MSECT by stopping the slave
4
inverter.
• When the time period from 838-MSECT starts a warning message
can be delivered. For this, the relevant function selector of the digi- 5
tal output must be set to the warning message WFDIG.
• The drives do not run angle-synchronously, but only speed-
synchronously under the influence of the coupling factor.
• Fast reference coupling is limited to output OSD01 and input ISD01.
6
• The digital output OSD01 has no function in the slave inverter
module.
• The coupling factor MSFCT is represented in INT 32Q16 number 7
format.
That means that the decimal places are represented at a pitch of
65536.
A

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-85
5 Software functions

Example of coupling factor calculation


given: i = 2.032 set: Programmable value MSFCT
1. 2.032 x 65536 = 133169.152
2. Eliminate decimal places: 133169
3. 133169 : 65536 = 2.0319

Structure of reference processing in the slave

Reference

ISD01
(SLAVE)

Telegram received no
Checksum OK Warning message

yes yes

no Error trigger
Last valid time elapsed
reference

yes

Error message

Execute reference Disable power


stage

Fig. 5.30 Structure of reference processing in the slave

If no telegram with a correct checksum is received within the error trigger


time the power stage is disabled when the time has elapsed.
During the error trigger time the last valid reference is executed.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-86


5 Software functions

5.5.8 _67BR-DC bra- Function Effect


king
• Feed of a direct current into • No braking resistor is 1
the motor, causing it to required to stop motors.
brake.

2
f [Hz]

3
0

IDC [A]
t 5
BRDCC
0
t

Start
1 6
0
t
BRTOF BRTMX

IDC =Output DC current of CDA3000 7


Fig. 5.31 DC braking with demagnetization time BRTOF and braking time
BRTMX
A
For demagnetization purposes no current is applied to the motor in the
time BRTOF, so the field in the motor can be safely removed. Then for the
time BRDCT the direct current BRDCC is injected into the motor and the
motor is braked without energy feedback into the inverter module. The
motor converts the braking energy directly into heat.

Note: If too short a demagnetization time is chosen, the residual magne-


tization of the motor may result in error shutdowns in the inverter
module.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-87
5 Software functions

Application with differing motor types:

• Asynchronous Braking time longer than braking with stop ramp,


motor: but no braking resistor necessary for inverter
✔ module.

• Synchronous No braking effect, because at high speeds the


motor, reluctance sum total of the braking torques per revolution is
motor: virtually zero (due to the rotor design). The resul-
ting regenerative operation may lead to error
messages.

Parameters for DC braking

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


670-BRDC Mode of actuation of DC braking OFF ... STOP OFF ✔
671-BRDCC Braking current for DC braking referred to
0 ... 180 80 %
device rated current
672-BRTMX Maximum DC braking time 0 ... 60 15 s ✔
673-BRTOF Demagnetization time before DC braking 0.10 ... 10.00 2 s ✔
674-BRTMN Minimum DC braking time 0 ... 65535 0 ms ✔

Table 5.61 Parameters from subject area _67BR DC braking

Explanatory notes

• Depending on parameter setting, the motor may either run down


uncontrolled, or be decelerated with a stop ramp or with direct cur-
rent.
• After DC braking the DC holding function can be appended to pre-
vent rotation due to the load on the motor.
• The DC braking function has priority over the stop ramp.
• The braking power is reduced to approx. one third of the braking
power in operation with a braking resistor (braking chopper opera-
tion).
• The minimum braking time (674-BRTMN) cannot be aborted by a
start signal.
• In the time between the minimum braking time (674-BRTMN) and
the maximum braking time (672-BRTMX) the DC braking can be
aborted by a start signal.
• The maximum braking time period (672-BRTMX) includes the mini-
mum braking time (674-BRTMN).

Application Manual CDA3000 5-88


5 Software functions

Settings of the DC braking activation mode

No.
Setting
BRDC
Function 1
0 OFF No DC braking
1 NSTRT DC braking active after cancellation of starting
Selection of DC braking via digital input or SOI 2
2 STOP control bit (field bus system)
Digital input: FIxxx = /STOP
Table 5.62 Settings for 670-BRDC DC braking 3

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-89
5 Software functions

5.5.9 _68HO-DC Function Effect


holding-on
• On completion of DC braking • Rotation of the motor shaft
an adjustable direct current under no load is prevented.
is injected into the motor. No holding torque is applied
against loading of the motor
shaft.

f [Hz]

t
IDC [A]
HODCC
0
t
1
Start
0
t
DECR HODCT

IE Output current of CDA3000


DECR (DECRx, STPRx or BRDC)
Fig. 5.32 DC holding for the time HODCT

Parameters for DC holding-on

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


Holding current referred to device rated
680-HODCC 0 ... 180 60 %
current
682-HODCT Holding time in DC holding 0.00 ... 60.00 0,5 s ✔

Table 5.63 Parameters from subject area _68HO DC holding-on

Explanatory notes

• Deactivation of DC holding by HODCT = 0 s.


• DC holding possible only following on from DC braking or a stop
ramp.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-90


5 Software functions

5.5.10_80CC-Current Function Effect


controller
• Setting of the PI controller for Optimum parameter setting of the 1
current control PI current controller for the
functions:
• DC braking
• DC holding
2
• Remagnetization (VFC)
• Current injection (VFC)
• Flux-forming current in SFC
3
Note: In the subject area “15FC Initial commissioning” the current con-
troller is automatically set optimally by initiation of the auto-tuning 4
process by way of parameter 161-ENSC = START.

5
Parameters of the current controller

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


800-CCG Current controller gain
0 ... 500
dependent 6
on inverter
801-CCTLG Current controller lag time dependent
0.001 ... 100 s
on inverter
802-CCTF Filter time constant for current dependent
7
0.0005 ... 20 s
measurement in SFC on inverter
803-VCSFC Correction of fault voltage characteristic
0 ... 199 70 % ✔
(SFC, FOR) A
804-CLIM1 CDS1: Maximum reference current for
0 ... 180 100 %
current control
805-CLIM2 CDS2: Maximum reference current for
0 ... 180 100 %
current control
Table 5.64 Parameters from subject area _80CC Current controller

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-91
5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

• The filter time constant for current measurement is used only by the
Sensorless Flux Control (SFC) mode.
• The following functions are operated with the parameters
determined by auto-tuning:
− DC braking
− DC holding
− Remagnetization (VFC)
− Current injection (VFC)
− Flux-forming current id in SFC or FOR
• The factory setting of the current controller relates to an IEC stan-
dard motor with the respective device power rating. You will find the
motor specification in the “Initial commissioning”.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-92


5 Software functions

5.5.11_64CA-Current- Function Effect


controlled
startup • The drive accelerates with • Protection against current 1
the preset acceleration ramp. overload shut-off in accelera-
When a programmable cur- tion from high load torques.
rent limit is reached the • Protection against drive stal-
acceleration is slowed or ling. 2
stopped, depending on
• Acceleration and decelera-
selected function, until suf-
tion processes with maxi-
ficient current reserves are
mum dynamics along the
available again.
current limit. 3
• The same applies to decele-
ration of the drive.

4
Parameters of current-controlled startup/rundown

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


639-CLTF Filter time constant for current-controlled
0.002 ... 20 0.01 s
5
startup/rundown
640-CLSL1 CDS1: Function selector 0 ... 2 2 ✔
641-CLCL1
642-CLFL1
CDS1: Current limit value
CDS1: Lowering frequency
0 ... 200
0 ... 100
100
4
%
Hz
6
643-CLFR1 CDS1: Initial frequency 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
644-CLRR1 CDS1: Lowering ramp 0 ... 1600 100 Hz
645-CLSL2 CDS1: Function selector 0 ... 2 2 ✔
7
646-CLCL2 CDS1: Current limit value 0 ... 200 100 %
647-CLFL2 CDS1: Lowering frequency 0 ... 100 4 Hz
648-CLFR2 CDS1: Initial frequency 0 ... 1600 0 Hz A
649-CLRR2 CDS1: Lowering ramp 0 ... 1600 100 Hz

Table 5.65 Parameters of subject area _64CA Current-controlled startup

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-93
5 Software functions

Settings of current-controlled startup/rundown

Setting
Function
CLSLx

0 Current-controlled startup inactive.


During acceleration with the acceleration ramp ACCRx (1), when 75% of the
current limit CLCLx (2) is reached the acceleration is reduced in linear mode
from 100% ACCRx at the current limit 75% CLCLx to 0% ACCRx at
100%CLCLx. This means that at 100% CLCLx the drive is no longer being
accelerated (3).

If the current limit 100% CLCLx is exceeded (4), the reference frequency is
reduced. The reduction is effected with the steepness specified in CLRRx.
The steepness rises in linear mode up to 100% CLRRx at the current limit
1
125% CLCLx. This process is limited when the lowering frequency CLFLx is
reached (5).

When the apparent current falls below the current limit 100% CLCLx the
drive is again accelerated with the acceleration ramp ACCRx. The conditi-
ons previously detailed apply once again.

The same also applies to braking, where the frequency can be increased up
to the maximum.
Function as in the case of CLSLx = 1, but the output frequency is stopped at
2
125% CLCLx. That is to say, there is no acceleration or frequency reduction.

Table 5.66 Settings for function selector CLSLx

Explanatory notes

• The function implements a current limitation by altering the startup/


rundown ramps.
• In the frequency range 0 Hz to CLFRx the current acceleration ramp
ACCRx is reduced to 25%.
• The control remains active after startup. In this way, under increa-
sing load – and thus increasing current – the speed is reduced
under ramp control, in order to protect the motor against stalling.
The same also applies to braking, where the frequency can be
increased up to the maximum.
• The current limit can be scaled from 0...100% by way of the analog
input ISA1. For this, the function selector must be set accordingly to
181-FISA1 = SCALE.
• The current limit CLCLx relates to the device rated current.

Application Manual CDA3000 5-94


5 Software functions

Example Acceleration and braking with CLSLx = 1


(motoric operation)
1
Acceleration Braking
I 125
[% CLCLx]
100
15/16 . Is 2
75

0
3
FMAXx

(2) (3) (4)

(1)
4
fout [Hz] (5)

CLFLx (3)

CLFRx
5
0

(1)
+100
(2) 6
Ramp
[%]
0
(3) (3) 7
(4)

(5) A
-100

ACCR DECR
STR 1
0

STL 1
0
t

CLFLxLowering frequency
CLFRxInitial frequency
(1) to (5) see Fig. 5.34
Fig. 5.33 Acceleration and braking in motorized operation
CLSLx = 1
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-95
5 Software functions

Notes for control engineers:

fout < CLFRx (initial frequency)

If the actual speed of the motor is below the initial frequency CLFRx, the
preset ramp steepness ACCRx/DECRx is limited to a quarter.

fout > CLFRx (initial frequency)

Operating state / Load Function

• Braking, regenerative
• Acceleration, motorized see Fig. 5.34
• Stationary, motorized
• Braking, motorized
see Fig. 5.35
• Acceleration, regenerative

Table 5.67 Modes of action of current-controlled startup/rundown

DECRx ACCRx
[%] [%]
(1)
100

100

(2)

100
CLCLx CLCLx
[%] of Is [%] of Is
0 0
125 75 75 125
(3)
100
(4)

(5)
100 100

CLRRx CLRRx
[%] [%]

Fig. 5.34 Dependency of the ramp steepness on the device rated current
dimensioned to the current limit value

Application Manual CDA3000 5-96


5 Software functions

ACCRx
DECRx [%]
100
1

75
2
50

3
25

0
50 100
Is [%] of Is
4
15/16 CLCLx

Fig. 5.35 Dependency of the ramp steepness on the device rated current
and load case dimensioned to the current limit CLCLx 5

Attention: In lifting applications, as a result of the regenerative loading 6


the drive may accelerate during braking when being lowered
due to the apparent current IS.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-97
5 Software functions

5.5.12_69PM- Function Effect


Modulation
• Setting of switching The higher the switching fre-
frequency of inverter power quency,
stage
• the lower the noise
• the smoother the motor runs
at high speed and
• the lower the output power of
the inverter module.
As the switching frequency (modulation frequency) increases the power
loss of the inverter module also increases. The reason for this lies in the
common losses in the switching of power semiconductors in the power
stage. This necessitates a reduction in the power of the inverter module in
order to prevent the device from overheating. The power rating is also
influenced by the motor cable length, the ambient temperature and the
mounting height.

Minimum switching frequency of power stage for very smooth


running of the motor

Switching frequency of power stage Output frequency of inverter

4 kHz to 400 Hz
8 kHz to 800 Hz
16 kHz to 1600 Hz

Table 5.68 Minimum switching frequency for adequately smooth running


of the motor

Rule of thumb: The modulation frequency should be 8 to 10 times the


maximum output frequency of the inverter.

Parameters of the modulation frequency

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


dependent
690-PMFS Switching frequency of power stage 4, 8, 16 kHz
on device
Table 5.69 Parameters from subject area _69PM Modulation

Application Manual CDA3000 5-98


5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

• Factory setting of devices < 22 kW:8 kHz 1


Factory setting of devices > 22 kW:4 kHz
• Safety functions for the device are automatically adapted to the
modulation frequency.
2
Permissible rated current of single-phase inverter module
0.37 kW to 2.2 kW
3
1 x 230 V mains voltage
45 °C ambient temperature

40 °C ambient temperature

40 °C ambient temperature

45 °C ambient temperature

40 °C ambient temperature

40 °C ambient temperature
16 kHz clock frequency

16 kHz clock frequency


4 kHz clock frequency

8 kHz clock frequency

4 kHz clock frequency

8 kHz clock frequency


4
10 m motor cable

10 m motor cable

10 m motor cable

25 m motor cable

25 m motor cable

25 m motor cable
5

Rated current Rated current Rated current Rated current4) Rated current4) Rated current4)
Inverter modules
[A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] 6
CDA32.003,Cx.x1 ) 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.25 2.15 2.00

CDA32.004,Cx.x2 ) 4.00 4.00 3.00 3.85 3.70 2.60


7
CDA32.006,Cx.x 5.60 5.40 4.00 5.45 5.25 3.85

CDA32.008,Cx.x3 ) 7.10 7.10 5.20 6.95 6.85 4.80

1) Mounted side-by-side, with no additional cooling area A


2) Mounted side-by-side, with backplane (650 mm x 100 mm = 0.065 m2) as additional cooling area
3) Inverter module with heat sink “HS32.200” and 20 mm gap when mounted side-by-side
4) The rated current with a 25 m motor cable is less than that with a 10 m motor cable by the amount of the current loss occurring on the motor
cable (see table 3.2.7)

Table 5.70 Output current for inverter modules with 230 V power supply

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-99
5 Software functions

Permissible rated current of three-phase inverter modules


0.75 kW to 90 kW
3 x 400 V mains voltage
45 °C ambient temperature

40 °C ambient temperature

40 °C ambient temperature

45 °C ambient temperature

40 °C ambient temperature

40 °C ambient temperature
16 kHz clock frequency

16 kHz clock frequency


4 kHz clock frequency

8 kHz clock frequency

4 kHz clock frequency

8 kHz clock frequency


10 m motor cable

10 m motor cable

10 m motor cable

25 m motor cable

25 m motor cable

25 m motor cable
Rated current Rated current Rated current Rated current Rated current Rated current
Inverter modules
[A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A]

CDA34.003,Cx.x 2.2 2.2 1.4 2.0 1.7 0.5


CDA34.005,Cx.x 4.1 4.2 2.3 3.9 3.6 1.4
CDA34.006,Wx.x 5.7 5.7 3.5 5.7 5.7 2.6
CDA34.008,Wx.x 7.8 7.8 7.8
CDA34.010,Wx.x 10 10 10
CDA34.014,Wx.x 14 14 14
CDA34.017,Wx.x 17 17 17
CDA34.024,Wx.x 24 24 24
CDA34.032,Wx.x 32 32 32
CDA34.045,Wx.x 45 45 45
CDA34.060,Wx.x 60 60 60
CDA34.072,Wx.x 72 72 72
CDA34.090,Wx.x 90 90 90
CDA34.110,Wx.x 110 110 110
CDA34.143,Wx.x 143 143 143
CDA34.170,Wx.x 170 170 170
1) Mounted side-by-side, with no additional cooling area
2) Mounted side-by-side, with heat sink “HS32.200”

Table 5.71 Output current for inverter modules with 400 V power supply

Application Manual CDA3000 5-100


5 Software functions

Current losses on motor cables

Mains voltage
1 x 230 V
Mains voltage
1 x 400 V
Mains voltage
1 x 460 V
1
Clock
Motor chokes Motor chokes Motor chokes
Frequency
without with without with without with 2
[mA per m] [mA per m] [mA per m] [mA per m] [mA per m] [mA per m]

4 10 15 20
8 15 30 40 3
16 25 60 70

Table 5.72 Current losses on motor cable dependent on clock frequency


4
Note: With motor cables > 10 m resp. 25 m please take care of current
losses.

5
5.5.13_84MD-Motor
Function Effect
data
• Filing of acquired motor data • The motor data can be 6
for further calculation transferred to other inverter
modules
• In systems with identical
motors no motor identifica- 7
tion is required as the para-
meters can be transferred

A
Motor data acquired during auto-tuning

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online

839-MONAM Name of motor 0 ... 28


characters
840-MOFNM Nominal pole flux 0 ... 100 * Vs
841-MOL_S Leakage inductance 0 ... 10 * H
842-MOR_S Stator resistance 0 ... 128 * W
843-MOR_R Rotor resistance 0 ... 500 * W
844-MONPP Number of pole pairs of motor 0 ... 32 *
850-MOL_M Magnetizing inductance of motor 0 ... 10 * H

Table 5.73 Parameters of subject area _84MD Motor data


DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 5-101
5 Software functions

Explanatory notes

• The fields marked with an asterisk (*) are dependent on the rated
power of the inverter module.
• In the factory setting the typical data of an IEC asynchronous stan-
dard motor of the device rated power are entered in the parameters.
• During auto-tuning of the inverter module (163-ENSC=START) the
motor data are acquired in the course of initial commissioning. The
precondition for this is correct input of the motor rating plate data.
• All motor data can be transferred by way of the SMARTCARD or the
DRIVEMANAGER. The parameters of the current and speed control
loops should additionally be transferred so that the motor can be run
correctly on the inverter module.

Simplified equivalent circuit diagram of the asynchronous


machine

s Slip
Xh Magnetizing inductance
R1 Stator phase resistance
R2 Rotor resistance
X1σ Stator leakage inductance
X2σ Rotor leakage inductance
RFE Core loss resistance
IM Magnetizing current

Application Manual CDA3000 5-102


1

2
6 Control modes
3
6.1 Voltage Frequency Control (VFC) ............................6-4
6.1.1 _70VF-Voltage Frequency Control ........................6-7
6.1.2 _74IR-IxR load compensation ............................6-12
4
6.1.3 _75SL-Slip compensation ..................................6-14
6.1.4 _76CI-Current injection ......................................6-16
6.1.5 _77MP-Magnetization ........................................6-18 5
6.2 Sensorless Flux Control (SFC) ..............................6-20
6.2.1 _78SS-Speed controller SFC ..............................6-25
6.2.2 _80CC-Current controller ..................................6-27 6
6.2.3 Tips and optimization aids for control engineers .6-28
6.3 Field-Oriented Regulation (FOR) ...........................6-38
6.3.1 _79EN-Encoder evaluation .................................6-41
7
6.3.2 _81SC-Speed controller FOR .............................6-43
6.3.3 _80CC-Current controller ...................................6-45
A

During commissioning of the inverter module three different control


methods can be selected. The necessary identification of the motor is
effected automatically by the CDA3000 inverter module, with all control
loops being preset to optimum settings.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-1
6 Control modes

Overview of motor control methods

Voltage Frequency Control (VFC): • Motor running is controlled by


characteristic.
− Asynchronous motors
• Voltage of motor is altered
− Reluctance motors
proportional to output fre-
− Synchronous motors quency of inverter.
− Special motors
Sensorless Flux Control (SFC): • Calculation of the rotor speed
and the current rotor angle
− Asynchronous motors
from the electrical variables.
• High torque based on calcu-
lation of the required cur-
rents.
• High dynamics and smooth
running
• Operation without encoder
Field-Oriented Regulation (FOR): • Calculation of the rotor speed
and the current rotor angle
− Asynchronous motors
from the encoder information.
• Very high torque based on
calculation of the required
currents.
• Maximum dynamics and
smoothness
• Operation with encoder

Properties of the motor control methods in comparison

VFC SFC FOR


Properties Voltage/Frequency Sensorless Flux Field-Oriented
Control Control Regulation
Torque rise time 20-30 ms < 2 ms < 2ms
Dynamic disturbance correction NO YES YES
Standstill torque NO NO YES
.M .
Acceleration torque1) 1.2 Nom 1.8 MNom 2.M Nom

Current usage of inverter 60% 90% 100%


Anti-stall protection limited YES YES

Table 6.1 Motor control method

Application Manual CDA3000 6-2


6 Control modes

VFC SFC FOR


Properties Voltage/Frequency Sensorless Flux Field-Oriented
Control Control Regulation 1
Speed manipulating range M = MNom 1:20 1:50 > 1:10000
2) 2)
Static speed accuracy typically 1 to 5% typically 0.5% quartz accurate2)
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz 0.0625 Hz 2-16 Hz
2
asynchronous
Motor principle synchronous asynchronous asynchronous
reluctance 3
1) IInverter = 2 . IMotor 2)
referred to nominal speed

Table 6.1 Motor control method


4

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-3
6 Control modes

6.1 Voltage Fre- The multiplicity of functions of Voltage Frequency Control does not permit
quency Control unrestricted simultaneous usage. However, in many cases it is possible to
(VFC) sequence functions such as DC braking followed by DC holding.

Combination of voltage frequency control functions

Current-controlled startup
IxR load compensation
1st active function →

Slip compensation
Remagnetization

Current injection

DC braking

DC holding
Activate 2nd function ↓

Remagnetization

Current injection ❍ ❍
IxR load compensation ❍ ✓ ✓
Slip compensation ❍ ✓ ✓
Current-controlled startup ✓ ✓
DC braking

DC holding

Simultaneous combination not possible

✓ Simultaneous combination possible without restriction

❍ Simultaneous combination possible only with restrictions:


In a fixed frequency range both functions may overlap and thus restrict
simultaneous working.
CIFRx
II IR + SL
100

[%]
0
(CIFMx + CIFRx)
CIFMx t [ms]

II: Current injection; IR: IxR load compensation; SL: Slip compensation
CIFMx: Limit frequency of current injection
Fig. 6.1 Combination of voltage frequency control functions

Application Manual CDA3000 6-4


6 Control modes

Note: The factory setting of the inverter module is Voltage Frequency


Control with 50 Hz characteristic over two interpolation points. 1
IxR load compensation and current injection are additionally
activated.

2
Note: Please take note of the general information regarding the proper-
ties of the motor control methods in the introduction to section 6
“Control modes”. 3

Is
Start 4
f Current Magneti-
injection zation

refvalue
Mains 5
f
Driving profile VFC
generator U
f U
Reference

t
f f U
6
f U
f
deltau
is_ramp deltaScope

I x R load
Current-
controlled
startup
Slip
compen-
sation
compen-
sation
7
isa isc
isb
Is Iw Iweff Iseff isa
Iw Active and
Is
apparent
current
isb
isc
A
calculation
is_ramp test point of the DriveManager digital scope

M
3~

Fig. 6.2 Block diagram of control circuit (VFC)

Monitored variables with the scope function

User level
Recording variable Abbreviation
menu
Reference value of control circuits refvalue 1
Actual value of control circuits actvalue 1
Frequency correction, caused by slip compensation deltaScope 3

Table 6.2 Monitored variables with the scope function


DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-5
6 Control modes

User level
Recording variable Abbreviation
menu
Voltage correction, caused by IxR load regulation deltau 3
Current in phase U isa 1
Current in phase V isb 1
Current in phase W isc 1
Apparent current after filter for current-controlled is_ramp
3
startup
Effective value of apparent current Iseff 1
Effective value of active current Iweff 1

Table 6.2 Monitored variables with the scope function

Application Manual CDA3000 6-6


6 Control modes

6.1.1 _70VF-Voltage Function Effect


Frequency
Control • Adaptation of the inverter • Generation of the optimum 1
module to the motor and to torque for the application.
the load characteristic of the
application
2
VNx

U [V]
4

VBx
5

FNx
Fig. 6.3 Voltage frequency control with two interpolation points 6

7
V5-1
V4-1 V6-1
V3-1 VN1 A
V2-1
U [V]
(1)
V1-1

VB1
F5-1
1-1

2-1

3-1

4-1

6-1

N1

Fig. 6.4 Voltage frequency control with six interpolation points

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-7
6 Control modes

Parameters of voltage frequency control

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


700-VB1 CDS1: Boost voltage 0 ... 100 0 V
701-VN1 CDS1: Motor rated voltage 0 ... * * V
702-FN1 CDS1: Motor rated frequency 0 ... 1600 50 Hz
703-V1-1 CDS1: Voltage buffer value 1 0 ... * 0 V
704-V2-1 CDS1: Voltage buffer value 2 0 ... * 0 V
705-V3-1 CDS1: Voltage buffer value 3 0 ... * 0 V
706-V4-1 CDS1: Voltage buffer value 4 0 ... * 0 V
707-V5-1 CDS1: Voltage buffer value 5 0 ... * 0 V
708-V6-1 CDScds1: Voltage buffer value 6 0 ... * 0 V
709-F1-1 CDS1: Frequency buffer value 1 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
710-F2-1 CDS1: Frequency buffer value 2 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
711-F3-1 CDS1: Frequency buffer value 3 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
712-F4-1 CDS1: Frequency buffer value 4 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
713-F5-1 CDS1: Frequency buffer value 5 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
714-F6-1 CDS1: Frequency buffer value 6 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
715-VB2 CDS2: Boost voltage 0 ... 100 0 V
716-VN2 CDS2: Motor rated voltage 0 ... * * V
717-FN2 CDS2: Motor rated frequency 0 ... 1600 50 Hz
718-V1-2 CDS2: Voltage buffer value 1 0 ... * 0 V
719-V2-2 CDS2: Voltage buffer value 2 0 ... * 0 V
720-V3-2 CDS2: Voltage buffer value 3 0 ... * 0 V
721-V4-2 CDS2: Voltage buffer value 4 0 ... * 0 V
722-V5-2 CDS2: Voltage buffer value 5 0 ... * 0 V
723-V6-2 CDS2: Voltage buffer value 6 0 ... * 0 V
724-F1-2 CDS2: Frequency buffer value 1 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
725-F2-2 CDS2: Frequency buffer value 2 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
726-F3-2 CDS2: Frequency buffer value 3 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
727-F4-2 CDS2: Frequency buffer value 4 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
728-F5-2 CDS2: Frequency buffer value 5 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
729-F6-2 CDS2: Frequency buffer value 6 0 ... 1600 0 Hz
CDS1: Assistance parameter for Voltage
730-ASCA1
Frequency Control
See Table 6.4 OFF ✓
CDS2: Assistance parameter for Voltage
731-ASCA2
Frequency Control
See Table 6.4 OFF ✓

Table 6.3 Parameters from subject area _70VF Voltage frequency


control

Application Manual CDA3000 6-8


6 Control modes

Explanatory notes

• The values marked with an asterisk (*) are dependent on device 1


version 230 V or 400 V.
• CDS1 = Characteristic data set 1, CDS2 = Characteristic data set 2
• The voltages between two interpolation points are interpolated in
linear mode.
2
• Interpolation points with the setting 0 Hz are inactive.
• The sequence of interpolation points is automatically sorted in
ascending order of frequency. As a result, a new interpolation point 3
can also be entered without having to shift other interpolation point
settings.
• During controller initialization the limit values of the settings are
checked. If the limit values are infringed an error message is deli-
4
vered (see Appendix).

5
Settings of assistance parameters 730-ASCA1 and 731-ASCA2
The parameters ASCU contain preset characteristic shapes based on the
setting options of the six interpolation points of the V/F characteristic.
6
No. Setting Function Usage

0 OFF
Fully programmable characteristic with up to six Optimum setting options for V/F control of 7
interpolation points special motors
Linear 50 Hz characteristic with two interpolation Standard motor (European market)
1 L50Hz
points
Linear 60 Hz characteristic with two interpolation Standard motor (American market) A
2 L60Hz
points
Linear 87 Hz characteristic with two interpolation Expanded manipulating range for ∆
3 L87Hz
points
Quadratic 50 Hz characteristic with six interpolation Standard motor (European market) for pump
4 Q50Hz
points and fan applications
Quadratic 60 Hz characteristic with six interpolation Standard motor (American market) for pump
5 Q60Hz
points and fan applications
Table 6.4 Setting of predefined V/F characteristics

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-9
6 Control modes

87 Hz characteristic for expanded manipulating range


The operating range with constant torque of a 400 V / 50 Hz motor in star
configuration can be expanded to 87 Hz in delta configuration.

Note: It should be investigated whether the motor is suitable for the load
(400 V / ∆ at 87 Hz). Only the motor manufacturer can give
precise information.

Example: Expanded manipulating range based on 87 Hz


characteristic
1. Motor data taken from rating plate
− Motor type: Asynchronous motor
− Rated power: 4 kW
− Nominal speed: 1420 rpm
− Rated voltage: 230 V / 400 V
− Configuration: ∆ / Y

2. Change motor circuitry on terminal board


− Change motor from star configuration (400 V / Υ) to delta confi-
guration (230 V / ∆).

3. Adapt power output of inverter module


− As a result of the changed configuration of the motor (400 V / ∆)
the power of the inverter module must be adjusted.
Condition: P Inverter ≥ P Motor ⋅ 3 P Inverter = ( 4kW ⋅ 1, 73 )
➢ Selected inverter module: CDA34.017 (rated power 7.5 kW)

4. Adapt specification of motor data in “Initial commissioning” subject


area.
a) 154-MOPNM = Pn50Hzx 3
b) 155-MOVNM = 400 V
c) 156-MOFN = 87 Hz
d) 157-MOSNM = nn50Hz x 3
e) 158-MOCNM = I∆Motor

Application Manual CDA3000 6-10


6 Control modes

5. Drive diagram of 87 Hz characteristic


1
U P M 230 V / 50 Hz
V kW MN 400 V / 87 Hz
fN
600 12 1,2 2
500 10 1,0

0,8 M
400 8

0,6
U 3
300 6 P

200 4 0,4

100 2 0,2 4
0 20 40 50 60 80 87 100 f
Hz
5
Fig. 6.5 Constant torque range to 87 Hz

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-11
6 Control modes

6.1.2 _74IR-IxR load Function Effect


compensation
• Automatic adaptation of the • In case of load surges a
V/F characteristic to the load higher torque is available
situation • The motor heats up less
• Compensation for voltage under load
drop on motor stator resistor

Mains
V/F characteristic

Reference [Hz]
U
U[v] ~=
f
-
U[v]
~
isa
Load isb
calculation
isc

M
3~

Fig. 6.6 IxR load compensation block diagram

IxR load compensation is implemented by shifting the V/F characteristic


by a voltage amount ∆Υ dependent on the active current. The V/F charac-
teristic is determined by the parameters from subject area _70VF Voltage
Frequency Control.

Parameters of IxR load compensation

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


740-IXR1 CDS1: IxR load compensation on/off OFF, ON ON ✔
741-KIXR1 CDS1: IxR compensation factor 0 ... 100 * Ω
742-IXR2 CDS2: IxR load compensation on/off OFF, ON ON ✔
743-KIXR2 CDS2: IxR compensation factor 0 ... 100 * Ω
744-IXRTF Filter time constant for IxR compensation 0.0005 ... 20 0.01 s
* device-depending, values refer to an asynchronous IEC standard motor with rated power of the inverter

Table 6.5 Parameters from subject area _74IR IxR load compensation

Application Manual CDA3000 6-12


6 Control modes

IW
[A]
U
[V]
1
U
UN
2
IW

U 3

4
0

FNx
CIFMx
CIFMx + CIFRx

f [Hz]

IW Active current
U Output voltage 6
UN Rated voltage
CIFMx Initial frequency
∆Υ Voltage adjustment by IxR load compensation
Fig. 6.7 V/F characteristics of IxR load compensation
7

Explanatory notes A
• The precondition for IxR load compensation is correct setting of
parameters 159-MOCOS (cosϕ) and 158-MOCNM (motor rated
current INM).
• If the output frequency exceeds the motor rated frequency (parame-
ter FNx), the IxR load compensation is deactivated. IxR load com-
pensation takes effect as from frequency CIFMx and is 100% active
as from frequency CIFMx + CIFRx.
• The stator resistance required for the function is automatically cal-
culated during initial commissioning and stored in parameter KIXRx
(IxR compensation factor). It corresponds to the ohmic stator resi-
stance measured between two motor cables.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-13
6 Control modes

6.1.3 _75SL-Slip com- Function Effect


pensation
• Increase output frequency • Compensate for the slip
proportional to the load on caused by the load on the
the motor motor, thus producing a
constant speed

Mains
V/F characteristic

Reference [Hz]
U
U[v] ~=
-
Df[Hz]
f
~
isa
Load isb
calculation
isc

M
3~

Fig. 6.8 Slip compensation block diagram

Parameters of slip compensation

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


750-SC1 CDS1: Slip compensation on/off OFF, ON OFF ✔
751-KSC1 CDS1: Slip compensation factor 0 ... 30 * %
752-SC2 CDS2: Slip compensation on/off OFF, ON OFF ✔
753-KSC2 CDS2: Slip compensation factor 0 ... 30 * %
754-KSCTF Filter time constant for slip compensation 0.0005 ... 20 0.01 s
* device-depending, values refer to an asynchronous IEC standard motor with rated power of the inverter

Table 6.6 Parameters from subject area _75SL Slip compensation

Application Manual CDA3000 6-14


6 Control modes

Explanatory notes

• The precondition for slip compensation is correct setting of parame- 1


ters MOCOS (cosϕ) and MOCNM (motor rated current INM).
• A frequency correction proportional to the active current is added to
the reference frequency. Slip compensation takes effect as from
frequency CIFMx and is 100% active as from frequency CIFMx +
2
CIFRx.
• The compensation factor KSCx required for the function is automati-
cally calculated during initial commissioning and stored in parame- 3
ter KSCx.
• The frequency correction ∆f may be positive or negative, depending
on whether motorized or regenerative operation is selected.
4
Note for control engineers: The compensation factor KSC can be calcu-
lated by the following equation:
5
n synch – n nom
KSCx = ------------------------------- ⋅ 100 %
n synch
6
Note: If the slip compensation and the IxR load compensation influence
each other, increasing the filter time of the slip compensation may
bring a remedy.
7

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-15
6 Control modes

6.1.4 _76CI-Current Function Effect


injection
• Current injection via the cur- • Increase the starting torque
rent control above a parame- up to the set limit frequency
terizable limit value (% of
rated current of the inverter)

CIFMx
f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0

II
CICNx
MP
I [A]
0

Start 1
0

t [s]

CIFMx Limit frequency of current injection


CCINx Reference for current injection
MP Remagnetization
II Current injection
Fig. 6.9 Current injection (II)

Parameters of current injection

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


760-CICN1 CDS1: Current injection reference 0 ... 180 80 %
761-CIFM1 CDS1: Current injection limit frequency 0 ... 100 4 Hz
762-CIFR1 CDS1: Current injection transition range 0.5 ... 10 2 Hz
763-CICN2 CDS2: Current injection reference 0 ... 180 80 %
764-CIFM2 CDS2: Current injection limit frequency 0 ... 100 4 Hz
765-CIFR2 CDS2: Current injection transition range 0.5 ... 10 2 Hz

Table 6.7 Parameters from subject area _76CI Current injection

Application Manual CDA3000 6-16


6 Control modes

Explanatory notes

• In the frequency range CIFRx the current injection is regulated back 1


to the normal operating current as from the limit frequency CIFMx.
• In conjunction with IxR load compensation and slip compensation,
current injection can only operate simultaneously to a limit degree in
the startup phase. 2

In a fixed frequency range both functions may overlap and thus 3


restrict simultaneous working.
CIFRx
II IR + SL
100
4
[%]
0

CIFMx
(CIFMx + CIFRx)
t [ms]
5
II: Current injection; IR: IxR load compensation;
SL: Slip compensation 6
CIFMx: Limit frequency of current injection

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-17
6 Control modes

6.1.5 _77MP-Magneti- Function Effect


zation
• Injection of a defined direct • Increase starting and stand-
current via a PI current still torque
control loop into the motor • Deactivation of Voltage
Frequency Control mode
during the magnetization and
flux build-up phase

f [Hz]
v [m/s] 0

MPCNx
MP
I [A]
0

Start 1
0

MPTx t [s]

MPCNx Magnetizing current


MPTx Remagnetization time
Fig. 6.10 Magnetization phase (MP)

Parameters of magnetization

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


770-MPCN1 CDS1: Magnetizing current 0 ... 180 33 %
771-MPT1 CDS1: Magnetization time VFC 0.00 ... 2.00 0.00 s
772-MPCN2 CDS2: Magnetizing current 0 ... 180 33 %
773-MPT2 CDS2: Magnetization time VFC 0.00 ... 2.00 0.00 s
774-MPT Magnetization time for SFC and FOR
0.00 ... 16.00 0.50 s
(calculated during auto-tuning)
Table 6.8 Parameters from subject area _77MP magnetization

Application Manual CDA3000 6-18


6 Control modes

Explanatory notes

• When the time MPTx elapses the inverter module switches to the 1
“Open-loop control/Closed-loop control active” state. That means
that during the magnetization phase voltage frequency control is
deactivated for a short time.
• The transition can be made directly from the magnetization phase to
2
current injection.
• The magnetization time for control modes SFC and FOR is
calculated during auto-tuning (163-ENSC) and should only be
altered by highly experienced control engineers.
3

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-19
6 Control modes

6.2 Sensorless Flux


Control (SFC)

Note: Please take note of the general information regarding the proper-
ties of the motor control methods in the introduction to section 6
“Control modes”. Sensorless Flux Control is only suitable for
asynchronous motors.

Principle of Sensorless Flux Control


Sensorless Flux Control is based on activation of the motor with voltages
which are oriented to the stator flux. To obtain stator flux orientation a
machine model of the asynchronous motor of which the parameters can
be calculated during auto-tuning is evaluated.
By transforming the currents and voltages into a coordinates system
oriented to the stator flux, the flux and torque build-up can be analyzed in
isolation from each other.
The stator flux angle εFS is estimated on the basis of the measured cur-
rent curves and the injected voltages. Consequently the d and q currents
and voltages are likewise estimated. The d-components of the current
and voltage point in the direction of the stator flux and thus contribute to
formation of the field (flux-forming). The 90° offset q-components of the
current and voltage run transverse to the stator flux and form the torque.

Application Manual CDA3000 6-20


6 Control modes

q-current
d-current 1

+
+ r

+
3

+
+

+
+

+
4
+

+
+

+
+

+
+

5
Magnetic flux as vector

Force as vector .

Fig. 6.11 Principle of function of the asynchronous motor 6

const. A
const.

Basic manipu- Field


lating range weakening range

Fig. 6.12 Characteristic of speed curves

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-21
6 Control modes

Software functions
In Sensorless Flux Control mode (SFC) not all functions of the inverter
module are required. The following functions can be selected, but they do
not activate.

Inactive functions in SFC


• Current injection
• IxR load compensation
• Slip compensation

Active functions in SFC

Section
Function Simultaneously with SFC
cross-reference

Current-controlled acceleration Section 6.1.6 ✔

DC braking Section 5.5.8


DC holding Section 5.5.9
Remagnetization Section 6.1.5 ✔

Table 6.9 Activatable functions in conjunction with SFC

Explanatory notes

• When subject to heavy load surges, which may cause rapid speed
changes, the stator flux orientation of the SFC may be lost, and cur-
rent overload shut-offs (error E-OC) may occur. This is counter-
acted by the “current-controlled startup” function (see section
5.5.11) setting a steep lowering ramp.
• The DC braking and DC holding functions can only be sequenced. If
both functions are activated the DC holding function is not activated
until the braking time has elapsed. No check that the rotor has come
to a standstill is made before activation of the holding time.

Information for auto-tuning


For auto-tuning of the controller and motor parameters the rating plate
data of the motor must be entered in the parameter of the “Initial com-
missioning” subject area (see section 5.1). Precise motor data should be
obtained as necessary from the manufacturer.

Application Manual CDA3000 6-22


6 Control modes

Note: The auto-tuning process autonomously determines the optimum


controller and motor parameters and enters them in the 1
corresponding parameters. Optimum parameter settings require
input of precise motor data in the “Initial commissioning” subject
area.
2
In special application cases a further optimization of the parameters
based on experimentation with the application may improve the result.
Manual optimization is particularly advisable for applications in the limit
zone of the electric power rating of the inverter module as well as in case
3
of major load surges, or for special motors (e.g. high-frequency spindles).
This optimization based on tests should bring the desired success in
terms of the drive solution. 4
Essential inputs of motor-specific data before start of auto-
tuning
5
Motor rating plate data Parameter Unit

Motor rated power 154-MOPNM kW


6
Motor rated voltage 155-MOVNM V
Motor rated frequency 156-MOFN Hz
Motor nominal speed 157-MOSNM rpm
Motor rated current 158-MOCNM A
7
Table 6.10 Motor-specific data

A
Explanatory notes

• The operating points of the motor are set based on these data, so
precise information from the motor manufacturer is important.
• The power factor 159-MOCOS and the control mode 300-CFCON
are of no relevance to auto-tuning of the controllers.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-23
6 Control modes

Important inputs of mass moments of inertia before start of


auto-tuning

Moments of inertia Parameter Unit

Motor 160-MOJNM kg*m2


161-SCJ1
Application
162-SCJ2 kg*m2

Table 6.11 Mass mass moments of inertia

Explanatory notes

• The parameters for the gain of the speed controller are set on the
basis of these data.

Specified mass moments of inertia


too high: Speed controller overshooting, too dynamic
too low: Speed controller settling slowly, too undynamic
• If the value 0 is entered, values are entered based on the stored
table values (see section 5.1). The expected response of the speed
controller is not optimal, but should be good enough for standard
applications.

Note: During identification the switching frequency of the power stage


690-PMFS should be set 4kHz, since then the influence of the
inverter fault voltages will be less. This has an effect in particular
on inverter power outputs above 22 kW.

Application Manual CDA3000 6-24


6 Control modes

6.2.1 _78SS-Speed
Function Effect
controller SFC
• Setting of speed control loop • Adaptation of the dynamic 1
properties of the motor to the
application

2
Final control element
Speed controller Current controller

freference id, ip reference Ud, Uq M


- 3~
id, iq actual
3
factual Motor model of eFS
asynchronous
machine
isa
isb
isc 4
Actual value calculation
of d-current and q-current
5
Fig. 6.13 Sensorless Flux Control SFC

Parameters of speed controller SFC 6


Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online

780-SSGF1 CDS1: Scaling of speed controller gain 0.00...999.95 100 % ✔ 7


781-SSG1 CDS1: Gain of speed controller 0...16383 1
782-SSTL1 CDS1: Speed controller lag time 0.001...2 0.02 s

783-SSTF1
CDS1: Filter time constant of speed
0.0005...20 0.02 s
A
estimate
784-SSGF2 CDS2 Scaling of speed controller gain 0.00...999.95 100 % ✔

785-SSG2 CDS2: Gain of speed controller 0...16383 1


786-SSTL2 CDS2: Speed controller lag time 0.001...2 0.02 s
CDS2: Filter time constant of speed
787-SSTF2 0.0005...20 0.02 s
estimate

Table 6.12 Parameters of speed controller SFC

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-25
6 Control modes

Explanatory notes

• All controllers are set by the initial commissioning. With the speed
controller SFC and the current controller (see section 5.10) it is pos-
sible to make fine adjustments of the controller properties to the
application where necessary.
• The quality of the dimensioning of the speed control loop is based
on exact values for the moments of inertia of the motor and the
system. If the value 0 is entered the inverter module enters
estimated moments of inertia for the motor and the system (see
section 5.1).
• The speed controller gain is adapted by way of the scaling parame-
ter SSGFx according to the requirements of the application.

Controller setting Effect

• Smooth running
SSGFx low • Disturbance compensation slow, the
controller appears undynamic
• Less smooth running
SSGFx high • Disturbance compensation fast, the
controller appears dynamic

Application Manual CDA3000 6-26


6 Control modes

6.2.2 _80CC-Current Function Effect


controller
• Setting of current controller • Optimum parameter setting 1
functions of the PI current controller

Note: The parameters of the current control subject area are detailed in
section 5.5.10. Please note the information given there.
2

3
Parameters of current control

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


4
800-CCG Current controller gain 0...500 48
801-CCTLG Current controller lag time 0.001...100 0.0036 s

802-CCTF
Filter time constant for current
measurement in SFC
0.0005...20 0.01 s 5
Correction factor of fault voltage
803-VCSFC 0...199 100 % ✔
characteristic SFC

804-CLIM1
CDS1: Maximum reference current for
0...180 100 % ✔
6
current control
CDS2: Maximum reference current for
805-CLIM2 0...180 100 % ✔
current control
7
Table 6.13 Parameters of subject area _80CC Current control

Explanatory notes A
• The filter time constant for current measurement is used only by the
Sensorless Flux Control (SFC) control mode.
• The parameters of the current controller are set automatically during
auto-tuning in the initial commissioning phase. It is not necessary to
change the obtained values of the PI controller for the gain
(800-CCG) and the lag time (801-CCTLG).
• The q-current is regulated to its reference value by the PI current
controller.
• The d-current generally deviates from its reference value. It can be
adjusted with the aid of parameter VCSFC, which permits adjust-
ment of the fault voltage characteristic to the application online.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-27
6 Control modes

6.2.3 Tips and optimi- The following section presents a tips and optimization aids to deal with
zation aids for typical application errors.

control engi- 1. Check that your wiring is connected properly and the phase
neers sequence is correct.
2. Enter correct (plausible) motor data and start auto-tuning.
3. Check the fault voltage compensation.
4. Check the speed controller.
5. Check the current control.

Note: When subject to heavy load surges, which may cause rapid speed
changes, the stator flux orientation of the SFC may be lost, and
current overload shut-offs (error E-OC) may occur. This error is
counteracted by the “current-controlled startup” function (see sec-
tion 5.5.11) setting a steep lowering ramp.

Application Manual CDA3000 6-28


6 Control modes

Structure diagram of SFC

1
1
isd
isa isb isc
wFS isq
id_est

iq_est
d,q

ib
ia
2
Voltage model
ic
a,b,c

- wFR

Mains
3
Speed estimate

d-current adaptation
uzk

isd *
- VCSFC
% ud
* d,q
4
d-current
wRS_est Flux input MOCNM controller
iqsoll usd
*
CLIMx
ACCRx DECRx SSGx SSTLx SSGFx % CCG CCTLG
SSTFx
% -
* uq
*
5
f isq
t
a,b,c
Speed control
Driving profile generator Current limitation iqsoll q-current controller usq
*
CLSLx
is_ramp
0
CLFRx CLRRx
M
3~
6
Is
t
Current-controlled startup

Measuring points of the scope


7
Parameter

εFS Stator flux angle A


* Reference
est Estimated value (by calculation)
Fig. 6.14 Structure diagram of Sensorless Flux Control

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-29
6 Control modes

Recording variables of the scope function in the DRIVEMANAGER

Recording variable Abbreviation User level menu

d-axis reference current idsoll 4


q-axis reference current iqsoll 4
d-axis current isd 4
q-axis current isq 4
Phase current phase U isa 1
Phase current phase V isb 1
Phase current phase W isc 1
Apparent current after filter for current-
is_ramp 3
controlled startup
DC-link voltage uzk 1
Slip frequency wFR 4
Output frequency (SFC) wFS 3
Rotor frequency wRS_est 1

Table 6.14 Recording variables in the structure diagram of control


with SFC ()

Optimization of the speed controller with the gain SSGFx


With precisely set moments of inertia, Sensorless Flux Control tends
toward 20-30 % overshoot when a stepped change of the frequency refe-
rence is set. This can be checked with the aid of the DRIVEMANAGER.

Note: The scope of the DRIVEMANAGER should be used to record the


step response. The reference step should only be set with a low
frequency (approx. 10 Hz).

Setting of the scope:


Reference step:Reference frequency before transfer to REF
Step response (actual value):Output frequency (FOR and SFC)
Current iq (torque): q-axis current

Application Manual CDA3000 6-30


6 Control modes

Attention: The following diagrams illustrate the ideal condition of a


system. In actual applications such characteristics are not 1
attainable because of backlash, elasticity or fluctuations in
moments.

3
f[Hz] I[A]

WFS
12 4
9
refvalue 5
6
isq

3 6
0
7
Gain SSGFx too high
→ Reduce value for SSFGx A
Fig. 6.15 Step response of frequency with high overshoot

Recording variable Abbreviation User level menu

d-axis reference current idsoll 4


q-axis reference current iqsoll 4
d-axis current isd 4
q-axis current isq 4
Phase current phase U isa 1
Phase current phase V isb 1
Phase current phase W isc 1
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-31
6 Control modes

Recording variable Abbreviation User level menu

Apparent current after filter for current-


is_ramp 3
controlled startup
DC-link voltage uzk 1
Slip frequency wFR 4
Output frequency (SFC) wFS 3
Rotor frequency wRS_est 1

f[Hz] I[A]

WFS
12

9
refvalue

6
isq
3

Gain SSGFx optimal


→ Do not change value for SSFGx
Fig. 6.16 Step response of frequency is optimal

Application Manual CDA3000 6-32


6 Control modes

1
f[Hz] WFS I[A]

2
12

9 3
refvalue

6
isq 4
3

0 5

Gain SSGFx too low 6


→ Increase value for SSFGx
Fig. 6.17 Step response of frequency with long settling time

7
Optimization of current control
With regard to the following optimization and adaptation tips it should be
remembered that the overall current is composed of the d and q current
based on the following relationship:
A

i = id2 + iq2

As a result the effective value of the apparent current is produced as:

IS = i 2
At a maximum device rated current (397-CFPNM) equivalent to the appa-
rent current IS the d and q current variables are thereby automatically
limited.
When the motor is run with nominal torque the nominal value of the d-cur-
rent is less than the nominal value of the q-current. In standard applicati-
ons which do not demand the nominal torque of the motor the q-current is
usually smaller than the d-current. DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-33
6 Control modes

→ Optimization of q-current
Optimization of the maximum reference current for current control
When subject to high load surges or heavy load it may be necessary to
adjust the maximum reference current. The limitation affects the refe-
rence value of the q-current (torque-forming) and finds its upper limit
value in the device rated current 397-CFPNM.

Note: A compromise needs to be found between the formation of a


maximum torque and the risk of current overload shut-offs (error
E-OC).

Setting CLIMx Effect

• Higher torque
Increase
• Greater tendency to current overload shut-off
• Lower torque
Reduce
• Low tendency to current overload shut-off

Table 6.15

→ Optimization of d-current
Adaptation of fault voltage characteristic
In the case of low resistances of the asynchronous motor (e.g. in motors
with higher power outputs) it may be necessary to optimize the current
controller by way of the fault voltage compensation by means of parame-
ter 803-VCSFC.

Note: A compromise needs to be found between formation of a high


torque at low speeds (VCSFC high) and stability of the control
(VCSFC low).

Application Manual CDA3000 6-34


6 Control modes

Optimization instructions:
1. Run motor with reference 0 Hz (parameter 597-RF0 = 0 Hz)
2. Open scope and set the currents “d-axis current” (isd) and “d-axis 1
reference current” (isd_soll). (Note: User level 4 required!)
3. Compare the currents and set them to the following ratio by way of
parameter 803-VCSFC: 2
”d-axis current” (isd) =0.9 * “d-axis reference current” (isd_soll)

3
Example: ASM with P = 1.5 kW,
UN = 400V,
INΥ = 3.7A in Υ−configuration
nN = 1410 rpm
4

After auto-tuning the inverter module set parameter 803-VCSFC at 68 %.


The following diagrams illustrate the effect of parameter 803-VCSFC. 5

Fig. 6.18 803-VCSFC = 199 %

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-35
6 Control modes

Fig. 6.19 803-VCSFC = 0 %

Fig. 6.20 803-VCSFC = 68 % after calculation by auto-tuning

Application Manual CDA3000 6-36


6 Control modes

If 803-VCSFC is too high the motor may rotate with maximum slip. This is
indicated by the fact that the estimated speed (400-ACTF) is unequal to
the specified reference speed and the current of the q-axis (isq) enters
the device limit. It is also shown on the motor, when the reference value is
1
0 Hz, by the motor shaft rotating slowly.

Tips and optimization aids


2
Problem Cause Remedy

• Identified magnetizing Influence of the fault voltages with higher


3
Reduce switching frequency 690-PMFS to
inductance too low inverter power (typically > 22 kW) and
4 kHz during auto-tuning
motors with low stator resistance
• Incorrect operating point of
motor
Correct nominal speed of ASM: 4
• Check rating plate data
• Incorrect number of pole pairs Synchronous speed entered as nominal
• Consult motor manufacturer or
detected speed
• estimate a logical value
and then restart a new auto-tuning process 5
• Torque too low because • Check plausibility of rating plate data
Imprecise data on motor rating plate
operating point wrong
• Nominal speed not attainable
because operating point wrong
Imprecise data on motor rating plate
• Check plausibility of rating plate data 6
Table 6.16 Optimization aids

7
Note: If you still have some queries after having read these optimization
aids, please contact your local sales adviser or our Service A
department specialists.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-37
6 Control modes

6.3 Field-Oriented
Regulation (FOR)

Note: Please take note of the general information regarding the proper-
ties of the motor control methods in the introduction to section 6
“Control modes”. Field-oriented speed control (FOR) is only
suitable for asynchronous motors.

Software functions
In field-oriented speed control (FOR) not all functions of the inverter
module are required. The following functions can be selected, but they do
not activate.

Inactive functions in FOR


• Current injection
• IxR load compensation
• Slip compensation

Active functions in FOR

Section
Function Simultaneously with FOR
cross-reference

Current-controlled acceleration Section 5.5.11 ✔

DC braking Section 5.5.8


DC holding Section 5.5.9
Remagnetization Section 6.1.5 ✔

Fig. 6.21 Activatable functions in conjunction with FOR

Explanatory notes

• Since setting of FOR represents a fully regulated system with speed


feedback, the “current-controlled startup” function is generally not
necessary.
• The DC braking and DC holding functions can only be sequenced. If
both functions are activated the DC holding function is not activated
until the braking time has elapsed. No check that the rotor has come
to a standstill is made before activation of the holding time.

Application Manual CDA3000 6-38


6 Control modes

Information for auto-tuning


For auto-tuning of the controller and motor parameters the rating plate
data of the motor must be entered in the parameter of the “Initial commis- 1
sioning” subject area (see section 5.1). Precise motor data should be
obtained as necessary from the manufacturer.

2
Note: The auto-tuning process autonomously determines the optimum
controller and motor parameters and enters them in the
corresponding parameters. Optimum parameter settings require
input of precise motor data in the “Initial commissioning” subject 3
area.

In special application cases a further optimization of the parameters


based on experimentation with the application may improve the result.
4
Manual optimization is particularly advisable for applications in the limit
zone of the electric power rating of the inverter module as well as in case
of major load surges, or for special motors. This optimization based on
tests should bring the desired success in terms of the drive solution.
5

Essential inputs of motor-specific data before start of auto-


tuning 6
Motor rating plate data Parameter Unit

Motor rated power 154-MOPNM kW 7


Motor rated voltage 155-MOVNM V
Motor rated frequency 156-MOFN Hz
Motor nominal speed 157-MOSNM rpm A
Motor rated current 158-MOCNM A

Fig. 6.22 Motor-specific data

Explanatory notes

• The operating points of the motor are set based on these data, so
precise information from the motor manufacturer is important.
• The power factor 159-MOCOS and the control mode 300-CFCON
are of no relevance to auto-tuning of the controllers.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-39
6 Control modes

Important inputs of mass moments of inertia before start of


auto-tuning

Moments of inertia Parameter Unit

Motor 160-MOJNM kg*m2


161-SCJ1
Application
162-SCJ2 kg*m2

Fig. 6.23 Mass moments of inertia

Explanatory notes

• The parameters for the gain of the speed controller are set on the
basis of these data.

Specified mass moments of inertia


too high: Speed controller overshooting, too dynamic
too low: Speed controller settling slowly, too undynamic
• If the value 0 is entered, values are entered based on the stored
table values (see section 5.1). The expected response of the speed
controller is not optimal, but should be good enough for standard
applications.

Note: During identification the switching frequency of the power stage


690-PMFS should be set 4kHz, since then the influence of the
inverter fault voltages will be less. This has an effect in particular
on inverter power outputs above 22 kW.

Application Manual CDA3000 6-40


6 Control modes

6.3.1 _79EN-Encoder Function Effect


evaluation
• Input of encoder data • Adaptation of the inverter 1
module to the encoder of the
motor

4
Fig. 6.24 Diagram:Block diagram of HTL output configuration

5
Note: In order to maintain the switching times and the edge steepness
of the encoder, the cable length dependent on the sampling rate
and the supply voltage must not be exceeded. Therefore please 6
refer to the manufacturer’s data sheet.

7
Parameters of the encoder evaluation subject area

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online


A
790-ECLNC Lines per revolution of encoder 32...16384 1024

Table 6.17 Parameters from subject area _79 EN-Encoder evaluation

Explanatory notes

• On the inverter module the A and B track of a HTL encoder can be


evaluated. Differential transducers cannot be evaluated.
• Permissible pulse counts are in the range 2n with n=5 to 14.
• For speed control the encoder signal in the inverter module is
quadrupled, so a good level of speed control is possible with small
pulse counts.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-41
6 Control modes

Formula for calculation of the minimum speed depending on the lines per
revolution of the encoder:

200 1
n min = ------------- ⋅ 60 ⋅ ---------
4 ⋅ SZ min
SZ Lines per revolution
nmin Minimum speed in [rpm]

Minimum speeds for speed control

Encoder lines Minimum frequency [Hz]


Minimum speed
per revolution
[Hz] 2-pole ASM 2-pole ASM 4-pole ASM
Imp/U

32 94 1.6 3.3
64 48 0.8 1.6
128 24 0.4 0.8
256 12 0.2 0.4
512 6 0.1 0.2
1024 3 0.05 0.1
2048 1.5 0.03 0.05
8192 0.4 0.01 0.03
16384 0.2 0.01 0.01

Table 6.18 Minimum speeds when using encoders with differing lines per
revolution

Application Manual CDA3000 6-42


6 Control modes

6.3.2 _81SC-Speed Function Effect


controller FOR
• Setting of speed control loop • Smooth running and good 1
dynamics of the drive

2
Final control element
Speed controller Current controller

freference id, iq reference Ud, Uq M


-
id, iq actual
3~ 3
factual

isa
isb
isc
4
RS
G

Actual speed filter Actual value calculation


of speed, d-current
and q-current
5
Fig. 6.25 Diagram: Structure diagram of speed control

Parameters of the speed controller FOR subject area


6

Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online

810-SCGF1 CDS1: Scaling of speed controller gain 0.00...999.95 100 % ✔


7
811-SCG1 CDS1: Speed controller gain 0...16383 1
812-SCTL1 CDS1: Speed controller lag time 0.001...2 0.02 s
813-SCTF1 CDS1: Jitter filter time constant 0...0.032 0.001 s
A
814-SCGF2 CDS2: Scaling of speed controller gain 0.00...999.95 100 % ✔

815-SCG2 CDS2: Speed controller gain 0...16383 1


816-SCTL2 CDS2: Speed controller lag time 0.001...2 0.02 s
817-SCTF2 CDS2: Jitter filter time constant 0...0.032 0.001 s
818-SCGF0 Speed controller gain at frequency zero 0.00...99.95 10 %
819-SCAVM Threshold value for actual speed monitoring 0-32764 3000 rpm

Table 6.19 Parameters from subject area _81SC-Speed controller FOR

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-43
6 Control modes

Explanatory notes

• All controllers are set by the initial commissioning. With the speed
controller FOR it is possible to make fine adjustments of the control-
ler properties to the application where necessary.
• The quality of the dimensioning of the speed control loop is based
on exact values for the moments of inertia of the motor and the
system. If the value 0 is entered the inverter module enters estima-
ted moments of inertia for the motor and the system (see section
5.1).
• The speed controller gain is adapted by way of the scaling parame-
ter SSGFx according to the requirements of the application.

Controller setting Effect

• Smooth running
SSGFx low • Disturbance compensation slow,
the controller appears undynamic
• Less smooth running
SSGFx high • Disturbance compensation fast,
the controller appears dynamic

Application Manual CDA3000 6-44


6 Control modes

6.3.3 _80CC-Current Function Effect


controller
• Setting of current controller • Optimum parameter setting 1
functions of the PI current controller

Note: The parameters of the current control subject area are detailed in
section 5.5.10. Please note the information given there.
2

Parameters of current controller 3


Parameter Function Value range FS Unit Online

800-CCG Current controller gain 0...500 48


4
801-CCTLG Current controller lag time 0.001...100 0.0036 s
802-CCTF Filter time constant for current measurement in SFC 0.0005...20 0.01 s
803-VCOR Correction factor of fault voltage characteristic 0...199 70 % ✔
5
804-CLIM1 CDS1: Maximum reference current for current control 0...180 100 %
805-CLIM2 CDS2: Maximum reference current for current control 0...180 100 %

Table 6.20 Parameters of subject area _80CC Current controller 6


Explanatory notes

• The fault voltage compensation does not generally need to be 7


adapted.
• The parameters of the current controller are set automatically during
auto-tuning in the initial commissioning phase. It is not necessary to
change the obtained values of the PI controller for the gain A
(800-CCG) and the lag time (801-CCTLG).

Tips and optimization aids for control engineers


The following section presents a tips and optimization aids to deal with
typical application errors.
1. Check that your wiring is connected properly and the phase
sequence is correct.
2. Enter correct (plausible) motor data and start auto-tuning.
3. Check the speed controller.
4. Check the current controller.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-45
6 Control modes

Structure diagram of FOR


1

wFS isd
id d,q ia isa isb isc
isq
iq
Voltage model ib

ic
wFR
a,b,c
-

Speed calculation Mains

uzk
- VCSFC
isd * % ud
* d,q
d-current
wRS_F Flux input controller
MOCNM
iqsoll usd
*
ACCRx DECRx SSGx SSTLx SSGFx CCG CCTLG
SSTFx CLIMx %
% -
f isq * *
uq
a,b,c
t
Speed control
Driving profile generator Current limitation iqsoll q-current controller
*
usq

CLSLx
is_ramp
0
CLFRx CLRRx
M
Is
t
3~
Current-controlled startup test point of DriveManager digital scope

SSGx parameter

εFS Stator flux angle


* Reference
est Estimated value (by calculation)
Fig. 6.26 Structure diagram of field-oriented speed control (FOR)

Application Manual CDA3000 6-46


6 Control modes

Recording variables of the scope function in the DRIVEMANAGER

Recording variable Abbreviation User level menu 1


d-axis reference current idsoll 4

q-axis reference current iqsoll 4


2
d-axis current isd 4

q-axis current isq 4

Phase current phase U isa 1


3
Phase current phase V isb 1

Phase current phase W isc 1 4


Apparent current after filter
is_ramp 3
for current-controlled startup

DC-link voltage uzk 1 5


Slip frequency wFR 4

Output frequency (FOR) wFS 3


6
Rotor frequency (FOR) wRS_F 1

Table 6.21 Recording variables in the structure diagram of control with


FOR (Fig. 6.26) 7
Optimization of the speed controller with the gain SSGFx
With precisely set moments of inertia, Sensorless Flux Control tends A
toward 20-30 % overshoot when a stepped change of the frequency refe-
rence is set. This can be checked with the aid of the DRIVEMANAGER.

Note: The scope of the DRIVEMANAGER should be used to record the


step response. The reference step should only be set with a low
frequency (approx. 10 Hz).

Setting of the scope:


Reference step: Reference frequency before
transfer to REF
Step response (actual value): Output frequency (FOR and SFC)
Current iq (torque): q-axis current

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-47
6 Control modes

Attention: The following diagrams illustrate the ideal condition of a


system. In actual applications such characteristics are not
attainable because of backlash, elasticity or fluctuations in
moments.

f[Hz] I[A]

WFS
12

9
refvalue

6
isq

Gain SSGFx too high


Reduce value for SCGFx
Fig. 6.27 Step response of frequency with high overshoot

Application Manual CDA3000 6-48


6 Control modes

1
f[Hz] I[A]

WFS 2
12

9 3
refvalue

6
isq 4
3

0
5

Gain SCGFx optimal 6


Do not change value for SCGFx
Fig. 6.28 Step response of frequency is optimal

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 6-49
6 Control modes

f[Hz] WFS I[A]

12

9
refvalue

6
isq

Gain SCGFx too low


Increase value for SCGFx
Fig. 6.29 Step response of frequency with long settling time

Application Manual CDA3000 6-50


1

2
Appendix A Overview of parameters
3
The following parameter overview contains all the parameters up to user
level 01-MODE = 4 in the factory setting (152-ASTER = DRV_1), in soft-
ware version V1.30-0. 4
Abbreviations:
R Read level (LE), indicates the user level 5
(01-MODE) as from which the parameter is
displayed
W Write level (SE), indicates the user level
(01-MODE) as from which the parameter can be
6
edited
RAM C V RAM control variable
RAM A V RAM actual value 7
FIXPT Fixed point
FLASH Flash-EPROM, retained after power-off
G dependent on device
A

Note: The DRIVEMANAGER has a user-friendly print function which you


can use at any time to print off your latest parameter list.

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-1
Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
_15FC-First commissioning, from page 5-4
150 SAVE Back-up device setup STOP 2 2 USIGN8 RAM C V
151 ASTPR Original device preset OFF 3 5 USIGN8 FLASH
152 ASTER Presets within the application data set (ADS) DRV_1 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
153 CFMOT Motor type AS 6 6 USIGN8 FLASH
154 MOPNM kW Motor rated power G 1 2 FLOAT32 FLASH
155 MOVNM V Motor rated voltage G 1 2 FLOAT32 FLASH
156 MOFN Hz Motor rated frequency 50 1 2 FLOAT32 FLASH
157 MOSNM rpm Nominal speed G 1 2 FLOAT32 FLASH
158 MOCNM A Motor rated current G 1 2 FLOAT32 FLASH
159 MOCOS Motor nominal cos-phi G 1 2 FLOAT32 FLASH
160 MOJNM kgmm Mass moment of inertia of the motor G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
161 SCJ1 kgmm CDS 1: Mass moment of inertia 0 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
of the system
162 SCJ2 kgmm CDS 2: Mass moment of inertia 0 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
of the system
163 ENSC Enable auto-tuning STOP 2 2 USIGN8 RAM C V
164 UDSWR Back-up device setup in a USER data set 1 3 3 USIGN8 RAM C V
165 UDSAC Activate USER data set 1 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
166 UDSSL Control location for switchover of the active PARAM 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
USER data set
167 SCPRO Auto-tuning progress indicator 0 2 6 STRING RAM C V
300 CFCON Current open-loop control / closed-loop VFC 2 2 USIGN8 FLASH
control mode of the device
_18IA-Analog inputs, from page 5-10
180 FISA0 Function selector analog standard input OFF 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
ISA00
181 FISA1 Function selector analog standard input OFF 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
ISA01
182 F0PX1 Hz Maximum value ISA0 at +10V, CDS 1 50 3 3 INT16 FLASH
183 F0PN1 Hz Minimum value ISA0 at +0V, CDS 1 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
184 F0NX1 Hz Maximum value ISA0 at -10V, CDS 1 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
185 F0NN1 Hz Minimum value ISA0 at -0V, CDS 1 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
186 F1PX1 Hz Maximum value ISA1 at +10V, CDS 1 50 3 3 INT16 FLASH
187 F1PN1 Hz Minimum value ISA1 at +0V, CDS 1 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
188 AFIL0 Filter for analog channel ISA0 0 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
189 AFIL1 Filter for analog channel ISA1 0 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
190 F0PX2 Hz Maximum value ISA0 at +10V, CDS 2 50 3 3 INT16 FLASH
191 F0PN2 Hz Minimum value ISA0 at +0V, CDS 2 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
192 IADB0 ISA0 play range 0.00 4 4 FIXPT16 FLASH
193 IADB1 Play range ISA1 0.00 4 4 FIXPT16 FLASH
194 F0NX2 Hz Maximum value ISA0 at -10V, CDS 2 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
195 F0NN2 Hz Minimum value ISA0 at -0V, CDS 2 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
196 F1PX2 Hz Maximum value ISA1 at +10V, CDS 2 50 3 3 INT16 FLASH
197 F1PN2 Hz Minimum value ISA1 at +0V, CDS 2 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH

Application Manual CDA3000 A-2


Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
_200A-Analog output, from page 5-14 1
200 FOSA0 Function selector analog output OSA00 ACTF 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
201 OAMN0 Minimum value for analog output OSA00 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
202 OAMX0 Maximum value for analog output OSA00 100 3 3 INT16 FLASH
203 OAFI0 Filter constant for OSA00 0 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH 2
204 TSCL Nm Torque (scaling value) G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
_21ID-Digital inputs, from page 5-17
210 FIS00 Function selector digital standard input STR 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
ISD00 3
211 FIS01 Function selector digital standard input STL 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
ISD01
212 FIS02 Function selector digital standard input SADD1 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
ISD02 4
213 FIS03 Function selector digital standard input OFF 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
ISD03
214 FIE00 Function selector digital input IED00 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
(terminal expansion) 5
215 FIE01 Function selector digital input IED01 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
(terminal expansion)
216 FIE02 Function selector digital input IED02 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH

217 FIE03
(terminal expansion)
Function selector digital input IED03 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
6
(terminal expansion)
218 FIE04 Function selector digital input IED04 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
(terminal expansion)
219 FIE05 Function selector digital input IED05 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH 7
(terminal expansion)
220 FIE06 Function selector digital input IED06 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
(terminal expansion)
221 FIE07 Function selector digital input IED07 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH A
(terminal expansion)
222 FIF0 Function selector virtual fixed input 0 OFF 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
223 FIF1 Function selector virtual fixed input 1 OFF 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
_24OD-Digital outputs, from page 5-21
240 FOS00 Function selector digital standard output BRK1 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
OSD00
241 FOS01 Function selector digital standard output REF 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
OSD01
242 FOS02 Function selector digital standard output S_RDY 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
OSD02 (relay)
243 FOE00 Function selector digital output OSE00 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
(terminal expansion)
244 FOE01 Function selector digital output OSE01 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
(terminal expansion)
245 FOE02 Function selector digital output OSE02 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
(terminal expansion)
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-3
Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
246 FOE03 Function selector digital output OSE03 OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
(terminal expansion)
_25CK-Clock input/Clock output, from page 5-24
250 OCLK Multiplier for clock output OSD01 1X 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
251 FFMX1 Hz Maximum value clock input 10 kHz, CDS 1 50 3 3 INT16 FLASH
252 FFMN1 Hz Minimum value clock input 10 kHz, CDS 1 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
253 FFMX2 Hz Maximum value clock input 10 kHz, CDS 2 50 3 3 INT16 FLASH
254 FFMN2 Hz Minimum value clock input 10 kHz, CDS 2 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
255 INCLF s Filter time constant for clock input 10 kHz 0.01 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
_26CL-Control location, from page 5-34
7 AUTO Auto-Start OFF 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
260 CLSEL Control location selector TERM 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
_27FF-Fixed frequencies, from page 5-78
270 FFIX1 Hz Fixed frequency CDS 1 20 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
271 FFIX2 Hz Fixed frequency CDS 2 20 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
_28RS-Reference structure, from page 5-26
280 RSSL1 Reference selector 1 FMAX 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
281 RSSL2 Reference selector 2 FCON 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
282 FA0 Hz Analog reference input ISA00 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
283 FA1 Hz Analog reference input ISA01 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
284 FSIO Hz Reference serial interface 0 4 6 INT32Q16 RAM C V
285 FPOT Hz Reference of MOP 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
286 FDIG Hz Digital reference input 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
287 FOPT1 Hz Reference value of option slot 1 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
288 FOPT2 Hz Reference value of option slot 2 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
289 SADD1 Offset for reference selector 1 10 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
290 SADD2 Offset for reference selector 2 0 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
291 REF1 Hz Reference of reference selector 1 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
292 REF2 Hz Reference of reference selector 2 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
293 REF3 Hz Reference before limiter 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
294 REF4 Hz Reference before ramp generator 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
295 REF5 Hz Reference after ramp generator 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
296 REF6 Hz Reference for transfer to control 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
297 RF1FA Factor for reference channel 1 100 4 4 USIGN16 FLASH
_30OL-Frequency limitation, from page 5-37
301 FMIN1 Hz Minimum frequency CDS 1 0 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
302 FMIN2 Hz Minimum frequency CDS 2 0 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
303 FMAX1 Hz Maximum frequency CDS 1 50 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
305 FMAX2 Hz Maximum frequency CDS 2 50 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
306 FMXA1 Hz Absolute limit output frequency CDS 1 1600 4 4 INT32Q16 FLASH
307 FMXA2 Hz Absolute limit output frequency CDS 2 1600 4 4 INT32Q16 FLASH
_31MB-Motor holding brake, from page 5-69
310 FBCW Hz Frequency limit for motor brake (clockwise) 3 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
311 FBCCW Hz Frequency limit for motor brake -3 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
(counter-clockwise)

Application Manual CDA3000 A-4


Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
312 FBHYS Hz Switch-on hysteresis of motor brake 1 4 4 USIGN16 FLASH 1
_32MP-MOP function, from page 5-71
320 MPSEL Configuration for motor operated potentio- 0 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
meter
_33MO-Motor protection, from page 5-39 2
330 MOPTC Type of PTC evaluation OFF 2 3 USIGN8 FLASH
331 MOPCB 2nd interpolation point motor protection 100 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
characteristic (referred to MOCNM)
332 MOPCA 1st interpolation point motor protection 100 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH 3
characteristic (referred to MOCNM)
333 MOPFB Hz 2nd interpolation point motor protection 50 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
characteristic
334 MOTMX Maximum motor temperature 150 4 4 USIGN16 FLASH 4
335 MOPCN A Motor rated current for motor protection G 1 2 FLOAT32 FLASH
336 MOPFN Hz Motor rated frequency for motor protection 50 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
_34PF-Power failure bridging, from page 5-47
340 PFSEL Power failure bridging selector 0 4 6 USIGN8 FLASH 5
351 PFC Power failure bridging active current 100 4 4 USIGN16 FLASH
reference
354 PFR Hz/s Deceleration ramp power failure bridging 999 4 6 INT32Q16 FLASH
_36KP-KEYPAD, from page 5-51 6
1 MODE User level of KP200 2 1 1 USIGN8 RAM C V
360 DISP Parameter for continuous actual value 406 2 2 USIGN16 FLASH
display of KP200
361 BARG Parameter for bar graph display of KP200 419 2 2 USIGN16 FLASH 7
362 PSW2 Password for user level 2 of KP200 0 2 2 USIGN16 FLASH
363 PSW3 Password for user level 3 of KP200 0 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
364 PSW4 Password for user level 4 of KP200 546 4 4 USIGN16 FLASH
367 PSWCT Password for Control menu of KP200 0 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH A
368 PNUM Parameter number display of KP200 on/off OFF 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
369 CTLFA Multiplier of incremental value in CTRL menu 10000 4 4 USIGN16 FLASH
of KP200
_38TX-Device capacity utilization, from page 5-53
304 CFCMX A Effective value of maximum current 8 4 7 FLOAT32 RAM A C
380 CACMX Max. current in acceleration phase in of 0 4 7 USIGN8 FLASH
device rated current
381 CDCMX Max. current in braking phase in of device 0 4 7 USIGN8 FLASH
rated current
382 CSTMX Max. current in stationary operation in of 0 4 7 USIGN8 FLASH
device rated current
384 CSCLR Reset peak value storage ACTIV 4 4 USIGN8 RAM C V
388 CMID Mean device capacity utilization 0 4 15 USIGN8 RAM A C
389 CMIDF s Filter time constant for mean device capacity 20 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
utilization
_39DD-Device data, from page 5-55
89 NAMDS Designation of parameter setting (data set) 1 2 STRING FLASH DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-5
Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
90 SREV Base standard version of modified 1.30 4 7 FIXPT16 RAM C V
software
92 REV Software version 1.30 1 7 FIXPT16 FLASH
106 CRIDX Revision index as suffix to version 00 4 7 USIGN8 RAM C V
number
127 S_NR Serial number of device 3 7 STRING FLASH
130 NAME Symbolic device name 1 6 STRING FLASH
390 TYPE Device type 30000 1 15 USIGN16 RAM A C
394 A_NR Article number of device 3 7 STRING FLASH
397 CFPNM A Device rated current 0 4 7 FLOAT32 RAM A C
_50WA-Warning messages, from page 5-59
120 WRN Warnings 0000H 3 15 USIGN16 RAM A C
500 WLTI Device temperature warning threshold 100 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
501 WLTD Interior temperature warning threshold 80 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
502 WLTM Motor temperature warning threshold 180 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
503 WLUV V Undervoltage warning threshold 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
504 WLOV V Voltage overload warning threshold 800 3 3 INT16 FLASH
505 WLF Hz Frequency warning threshold 0 3 3 INT16 FLASH
506 WLIS A Apparent current warning threshold 999.95 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
_51ER-Error messages, from page 5-62
74 ERES Reset device errors STOP 4 4 USIGN8 RAM C V
94 TERR min System time on occurrence of last error 0 1 7 USIGN16 RAM A C
95 ERR1 Last error - 0.0h 1 7 STRING FLASH
96 ERR2 Last-but-one error - 0.0h 2 7 STRING FLASH
97 ERR3 Last-but-two error - 0.0h 2 7 STRING FLASH
98 ERR4 Last-but-three error - 0.0h 2 7 STRING FLASH
140 R-RNM Response to error in setting of a mode 3 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
510 R-SIO Response to SIO watchdog 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
511 R-CPU Response to CPU error 3 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
512 R-OFF Response to undervoltage 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
513 R-OC Response to current overload 2 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
514 R-OV Response to voltage overload 2 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
515 R-OLI Response to controller I*I*t shut-off 2 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
516 R-OTM Response to motor overheating 2 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
517 R-OTI Response to controller overheating 2 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
518 R-SC Response to error during initial 2 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
commissioning
519 R-OLM Response to motor I*t shut-off 2 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
520 R-PLS Response to software runtime error 3 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
521 R-PAR Response to faulty parameter list 3 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
522 R-FLT Response to floating point error 3 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
523 R-PWR Response to unknown power pack 3 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
524 R-EXT Response to external error message 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
525 R-USR Response to modified software error 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
message
526 R-OP1 Response to error in option module slot 1 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH

Application Manual CDA3000 A-6


Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
527 R-OP2 Response to error in option module slot 2 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH 1
528 R-WRN Response to warnings 0 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
529 R-WBK Response to wire break ISA0 (4..20mA) 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
530 R-EEP Response to memory error (EEPROM) 3 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
531 EFSCL Ground fault detection response threshold 0 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH 2
scaling
532 R-PF Response after DC-link buffering 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
533 R-FDG Response to reference coupling transmission 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
error 3
534 R-LSW Response to reversed limit switches 2 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
_55LB-LUSTBUS, from page 5-65
81 SBAUD 1/s LustBus transfer rate 57600 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
82 SADDR LustBus device address 1 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH 4
83 SDMMY LustBus dummy parameter 0 4 4 USIGN8 RAM C V
84 SWDGT s LustBus watchdog time setting 0.00 4 4 FIXPT16 FLASH
85 SERR LustBus error status word 00H 4 4 USIGN8 RAM A C
550 SSTAT Status word of serial interface 0000H 4 4 USIGN16 RAM A C 5
551 SCNTL Control word of serial interface 0000H 4 4 USIGN16 RAM C V
_57OP-Option modules, from page 5-67
489 CLBDR CANlust baud rate 500 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
492 CACNF CANlust control/reference transfer mode 2 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH 6
570 CAMOD Function selection option module CANlust SLAVE 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
571 CLADR CANlust device address 0 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
572 CASTA CAN bus status word 0000H 3 15 USIGN16 RAM A C
573 CACTR CAN bus control word 0000H 3 15 USIGN16 RAM A C 7
574 CAWDG ms CAN bus watchdog time (0 = OFF) 0 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
575 CASCY ms Sampling time for status message (ms) 80 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
576 OP1RV Software version option module slot 1 0.00 3 7 FIXPT16 RAM A C
577 OP2RV Software version option module slot 2 0.00 3 7 FIXPT16 RAM A C A
580 COADR CANopen device address 1 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
581 COBDR CANopen baud rate 500 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
582 PBADR Profibus DP device address 0 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
_59DP-Driving profile generator, from page 5-74
590 ACCR1 Hz/s Acceleration ramp CDS 1 20 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
591 ACCR2 Hz/s Acceleration ramp CDS 2 20 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
592 DECR1 Hz/s Deceleration ramp CDS 1 20 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
593 DECR2 Hz/s Deceleration ramp CDS 2 20 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
594 STPR1 Hz/s Stop ramp CDS 1 20 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
595 STPR2 Hz/s Stop ramp CDS 2 20 2 2 INT32Q16 FLASH
596 JTIME ms Smoothing time of S-shaped ramp in ms 0 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
597 RF0 Response with reference 0Hz OFF 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
_60TB-Driving sets, from page 5-79
600 FFTB0 Hz Table frequency 1 5 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
601 FFTB1 Hz Table frequency 2 10 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
602 FFTB2 Hz Table frequency 3 15 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-7
Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
603 FFTB3 Hz Table frequency 4 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
604 FFTB4 Hz Table frequency 5 25 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
605 FFTB5 Hz Table frequency 6 30 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
606 FFTB6 Hz Table frequency 7 40 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
607 FFTB7 Hz Table frequency 8 50 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
608 TACR0 Hz/s Table acceleration ramp 1 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
609 TACR1 Hz/s Table acceleration ramp 2 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
610 TACR2 Hz/s Table acceleration ramp 3 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
611 TACR3 Hz/s Table acceleration ramp 4 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
612 TACR4 Hz/s Table acceleration ramp 5 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
613 TACR5 Hz/s Table acceleration ramp 6 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
614 TACR6 Hz/s Table acceleration ramp 7 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
615 TACR7 Hz/s Table acceleration ramp 8 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
616 TDCR0 Hz/s Table deceleration ramp 1 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
617 TDCR1 Hz/s Table deceleration ramp 2 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
618 TDCR2 Hz/s Table deceleration ramp 3 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
619 TDCR3 Hz/s Table deceleration ramp 4 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
620 TDCR4 Hz/s Table deceleration ramp 5 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
621 TDCR5 Hz/s Table deceleration ramp 6 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
622 TDCR6 Hz/s Table deceleration ramp 7 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
623 TDCR7 Hz/s Table deceleration ramp 8 20 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
624 TBSEL Table driving set selection 0 3 15 USIGN8 RAM A C
_64CA-Current-controlled startup, from page 5-93
639 CLTF s Filter time constant for current-controlled 0.01 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
startup/rundown
640 CLSL1 CDS 1: Current-controlled startup function 2 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
selector
641 CLCL1 CDS 1: Current-controlled startup current 100 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
limit
642 CLFL1 Hz CDS 1: Current-controlled startup lowering 4 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
frequency
643 CLFR1 Hz CDS 1: Current-controlled startup initial 0 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
frequency
644 CLRR1 Hz/s CDS 1: Current-controlled startup lowering 100 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
ramp
645 CLSL2 CDS 2: Current-controlled startup function 2 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
selector
646 CLCL2 CDS 2: Current-controlled startup current 100 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
limit
647 CLFL2 Hz CDS 2: Current-controlled startup lowering 4 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
frequency
648 CLFR2 Hz CDS 2: Current-controlled startup initial 0 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
frequency
649 CLRR2 Hz/s CDS 2: Current-controlled startup lowering 100 3 3 INT32Q16 FLASH
ramp

Application Manual CDA3000 A-8


Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
_65CS-Characteristic data set (CDS), from page 5-82 1
650 CDSAC Activate characteristic data set (CDS) 0 2 15 USIGN8 RAM C V
651 CDSSL Control location for switchover of OFF 2 3 USIGN8 FLASH
characteristic data set (CDS)
652 FLIM Hz Limit frequency for switchover CDS 2 20 2 3 INT32Q16 FLASH 2
_66MS-Master/Slave operation, from page 5-84
837 MSFCT Master-Slave coupling factor (FDIG) 1 4 4 INT32Q16 FLASH
838 MSECT ms Error trigger time in case of failure of 0 4 4 USIGN16 FLASH
reference master 3
_67BR-DC braking, from page 5-87
670 BRDC Mode of actuation of DC braking OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
671 BRDCC Braking current for DC braking 80 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
672 BRTMX s Maximum DC braking time 15 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH 4
673 BRTOF s Demagnetization time before DC braking 2.00 4 4 FIXPT16 FLASH
674 BRTMN ms Minimum DC braking time 0 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
_68HO-DC holding-on, from page 5-90
680 HODCC DC holding current 60 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
5
681 HODCT s DC holding time 3.00 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
_69PM-Modulation, from page 5-98
690 PMFS Switching frequency of power stage
_70VF-Voltage Frequency Control, from page 6-7
G 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
6
700 VB1 V CDS 1: Boost voltage G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
701 VN1 V CDS 1: Motor rated voltage G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
702
703
FN1
V1-1
Hz
V
CDS 1: Motor rated frequency
CDS 1: Voltage buffer value 1
50
0
3
4
3
4
FLOAT32
FLOAT32
FLASH
FLASH
7
704 V2-1 V CDS 1: Voltage buffer value 2 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
705 V3-1 V CDS 1: Voltage buffer value 3 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
706
707
V4-1
V5-1
V
V
CDS 1: Voltage buffer value 4
CDS 1: Voltage buffer value 5
0
0
4
4
4
4
FLOAT32
FLOAT32
FLASH
FLASH
A
708 V6-1 V CDS 1: Voltage buffer value 6 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
709 F1-1 Hz CDS 1: Frequency buffer value 1 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
710 F2-1 Hz CDS 1: Frequency buffer value 2 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
711 F3-1 Hz CDS 1: Frequency buffer value 3 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
712 F4-1 Hz CDS 1: Frequency buffer value 4 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
713 F5-1 Hz CDS 1: Frequency buffer value 5 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
714 F6-1 Hz CDS 1: Frequency buffer value 6 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
715 VB2 V CDS 2: Boost voltage G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
716 VN2 V CDS 2: Motor rated voltage G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
717 FN2 Hz CDS 2: Motor rated frequency 50 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
718 V1-2 V CDS 2: Voltage buffer value 1 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
719 V2-2 V CDS 2: Voltage buffer value 2 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
720 V3-2 V CDS 2: Voltage buffer value 3 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
721 V4-2 V CDS 2: Voltage buffer value 4 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
722 V5-2 V CDS 2: Voltage buffer value 5 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
723 V6-2 V CDS 2: Voltage buffer value 6 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-9
Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
724 F1-2 Hz CDS 2: Frequency buffer value 1 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
725 F2-2 Hz CDS 2: Frequency buffer value 2 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
726 F3-2 Hz CDS 2: Frequency buffer value 3 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
727 F4-2 Hz CDS 2: Frequency buffer value 4 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
728 F5-2 Hz CDS 2: Frequency buffer value 5 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
729 F6-2 Hz CDS 2: Frequency buffer value 6 0 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
730 ASCA1 Assistance parameter for Voltage Frequency OFF 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
Control in CDS 1
731 ASCA2 Assistance parameter for Voltage Frequency OFF 1 2 USIGN8 FLASH
Control in CDS 2
_74IR-IxR load compensation, from page 6-12
740 IXR1 CDS 1: I*R load compensation on/off ON 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
741 KIXR1 Ohm CDS 1: I*R compensation factor G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
742 IXR2 CDS 2: I*R load compensation on/off ON 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
743 KIXR2 Ohm CDS 2: I*R compensation factor G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
744 IXRTF s Filter time constant for IxR 0.01 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
compensation
_75SL-Slip compensation, from page 6-14
750 SC1 CDS 1: Slip compensation on/off OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
751 KSC1 CDS 1: Slip compensation factor G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
752 SC2 CDS 2: Slip compensation on/off OFF 3 3 USIGN8 FLASH
753 KSC2 CDS 2: Slip compensation factor G 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
754 KSCTF s Filter time constant for slip 0.01 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
compensation
_76CI-Current injection, from page 6-16
760 CICN1 CDS 1: Current injection reference 80 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
761 CIFM1 Hz CDS 1: Current injection limit frequency 4 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
762 CIFR1 Hz CDS 1: Current injection transition range 2 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
763 CICN2 CDS 2: Current injection reference 80 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
764 CIFM2 Hz CDS 2: Current injection limit frequency 4 3 3 FLOAT32 FLASH
765 CIFR2 Hz CDS 2: Current injection transition range 2 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
_77MP-Magnetization, from page 6-18
770 MPCN1 CDS 1: Magnetizing current 33 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
771 MPT1 s CDS 1: Magnetization time 0.00 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
772 MPCN2 CDS 2: Magnetizing current 33 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
773 MPT2 s CDS 2: Magnetization time 0.00 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
774 MPT s Magnetization time for SFC and FOR 0.50 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
_78SS-Speed controller SFC, from page 6-25
780 SSGF1 CDS 1: Scaling of speed controller gain 100.00 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
781 SSG1 CDS 1: Speed controller gain 1 3 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
782 SSTL1 s CDS 1: Speed controller lag time G 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
783 SSTF1 s CDS 1: Filter time constant of speed G 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
estimate
784 SSGF2 CDS 2: Scaling of speed controller gain 100.00 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
785 SSG2 CDS 2: Speed controller gain 1 3 4 FLOAT32 FLASH

Application Manual CDA3000 A-10


Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
786 SSTL2 s CDS 2: Speed controller lag time G 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH 1
787 SSTF2 s CDS 2: Filter time constant of speed 0.02 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
estimate
_79EN-Encoder evaluation, from page 6-41
790 ECLNC Lines per revolution of encoder 1024 2 3 USIGN16 FLASH 2
_80CC-Current controller, from page 6-45
800 CCG Current controller gain G 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
801 CCTLG s Current controller lag time G 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
802 CCTF s Filter time constant for current 0.01 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH 3
measurement
803 VCSFC Correction factor of fault voltage 70 4 4 USIGN8 FLASH
characteristic
804 CLIM1 CDS 1: Maximum reference current for 100 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH 4
current control
805 CLIM2 CDS 2: Maximum reference current for 100 3 3 USIGN16 FLASH
current control
_81SC-Speed controller FOR, from page 6-43 5
810 SCGF1 CDS 1: Scaling of speed controller gain 100.00 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
811 SCG1 CDS 1: Speed controller gain 1 3 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
812 SCTL1 s CDS 1: Speed controller lag time 0.02 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
813 SCTF1 s CDS 1: Jitter filter time constant 0.001 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH 6
814 SCGF2 CDS 2: Scaling of speed controller gain 100.00 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
815 SCG2 CDS 2: Speed controller gain 1 3 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
816 SCTL2 s CDS 2: Speed controller lag time 0.02 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH
817 SCTF2 s CDS 2: Jitter filter time constant 0.001 4 4 FLOAT32 FLASH 7
818 SCGF0 Speed controller gain at frequency zero 10.00 3 3 FIXPT16 FLASH
_84MD-Motor data, from page 5-101
839 MONAM Symbolic motor name 3 3 STRING FLASH
(max. 64 characters) A
840 MOFNM Vs Nominal pole flux G 4 5 FLOAT32 FLASH
841 MOL_S H Leakage inductance G 4 5 FLOAT32 FLASH
842 MOR_S Ohm Stator resistance G 4 5 FLOAT32 FLASH
843 MOR_R Ohm Rotor resistance G 4 5 FLOAT32 FLASH
844 MONPP Number of pole pairs of motor 2 4 5 USIGN8 FLASH
850 MOL_M H Magnetizing inductance from G 4 15 FLOAT32 RAM A C
mag. characteristic
_86SY System
4 PROG Reset device to factory setting 2 4 4 USIGN16 FLASH
15 PLRDY Activate control initialization OFF 4 4 USIGN8 RAM C V
Menu control KP200
8 GROUP Subject area of KP200 _15FC 1 1 USIGN8 RAM C V
VAL menu actual value parameter
14 ACTT Nm Actual torque 0 1 7 INT32Q16 RAM A C
86 TSYS min System time after power-up in [min]. 0 3 15 USIGN16 RAM A C
87 TOP h Operating hours meter 0 3 7 USIGN16 FLASH
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-11
Appendix A Overview of parameters

Factory Data Memory


No. Name Unit Function Your set. R W
set. type type
400 ACTF Hz Current Actual frequency 0 1 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
401 ACTN rpm Actual speed 0 1 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
404 VMOT V Output voltage of inverter 0.00 1 15 FIXPT16 RAM A C
405 DCV V DC-link voltage 0.00 1 15 FIXPT16 RAM A C
406 REFF Hz Current reference frequency 0 1 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
407 MTEMP Motor temperature in KTY84 evaluation 0.00 1 15 FIXPT16 RAM A C
408 APCUR A Effective value of apparent current 0.00 1 15 FIXPT16 RAM A C
409 ACCUR A Effective value of active current 0.00 1 15 FIXPT16 RAM A C
413 ACTOP h Operating hours of power stage 0 1 7 USIGN16 FLASH
415 AINP Unfiltered analog values of the reference 0 4 15 INT16 RAM A C
inputs
416 ISA0 V Filtered input voltage ISA0 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
417 ISA1 V Filtered input voltage ISA1 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
418 ISA0I Filtered input current ISA0 0 4 15 INT32Q16 RAM A C
419 IOSTA States of digital and analog I/Os 0000H 2 15 USIGN16 RAM A C
422 CNTL Control word of system 0000H 4 15 USIGN16 RAM A C
423 ERPAR Number of a possibly faulty parameter in the 0 4 15 USIGN16 RAM A C
startup phase
425 DTEMP Interior temperature 0.00 1 15 FIXPT16 RAM A C
427 KTEMP Heat sink temperature 0.00 1 15 FIXPT16 RAM A C
428 PS W Apparent power 0 1 15 FLOAT32 RAM A C
429 PW W Active power 0 1 15 FLOAT32 RAM A C

Application Manual CDA3000 A-12


1

2
Appendix B Error messages
3
If an error occurs during operation, there are following signals:

• CDA3000: The red LED (H1)


flashes (flash codes 4
see Section 2.5)

• DRIVEMANAGER Possible causes and remedies will be dis-


played in a message window.
6
• KEYPAD KP200: The display is lit red and displays the kind
of error (1) and an error location number
(2). This number provides a more detailed 7
determination of the error cause.

(2)
A
VAL

(1)

Acknowledgment and resetting of errors


Errors can be acknowledged and reset in various ways:
• Rising edge at digital input ENPO
• Rising edge at a programmable digital input with setting of the
function selector to ERES
• Write value 1 to parameter 74-ERES via control unit or bus system

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-13
Appendix B Error messages

Response to error
In case of error the inverter module CDA3000 reacts with one of those
error responses (see Table A.2):

Bus DM/KP Function

0 WRN No response
1 HALT Disable power stage
Disable power stage and secure against restarting
2 LOCK
(prevent autostart)
Disable power stage and reset device after confirmation of
3 RESET
error

Table A.1 Settings for parameters in subject area _51ER

Error messages

Error
Bus DM/KP Cause Remedy Response
location
0 -- -- No error
1 E-CPU 1 Error due to defective control unit or incorrect Switch device off/on. (1) RESET
software version
8 Error in self-test: Parameter initialization fai- Switch device off/on. (1)
led due to faulty parameter description
17 RAM area for scope functionality inadequate (1)
30 Program memory data faulty (1)
2 OFF 1 DC-link voltage too low (also indicated on Rectify power failure or connect hig- HALT
normal power-off) her mains voltage
3 E-OC 1 Current overload due to 1. Incorrectly set 1. Check parameters of control cir- LOCK
parameters; 2. Short, earth fault or insulation cuits; 2. Check installation; 3. (1)
fault; 3. Internal device defect
4 E-OV 1 Voltage overload due to 1. Braking chopper 1. Set DECR ramp parameter slower LOCK
overload (braked too long or too much); 2. (_REF), use braking resistor or chop-
Mains power overload per; 2. Adjust mains voltage
5 E-OLM 1 Ixt shut-off to protect motor (permissible cur- 1. Reduce load; 2. Use a higher- LOCK
rent/time area exceeded) powered motor
6 E-OLI 1 I^2xt shut-off to protect power stage (per- Reduce load LOCK
missible current/time area exceeded)
7 E-OTM 18 Motor overheating (PTC in motor tripped) due 1. Allow motor to cool down; 2. Con- LOCK
to 1. PTC not connected; 2. Motor overload nect PTC or jumper terminals with
100 Ohm; 3. Use a higher-powered
motor
(1) Please contact Your service provider if this error occurs again.

Table A.2 Error messages of the CDA3000

Application Manual CDA3000 A-14


Appendix B Error messages

Error
Bus DM/KP Cause Remedy Response
location
8 E-OTI 31 Power stage overheating due to 1. Ambient 1. Improve ventilation; 2. Use a hig- LOCK
1
temperature too high; 2. Load too high her-powered device
(power stage or braking chopper)
32 Overheating in device interior due to 1. Ambi- 1. Improve ventilation; 2. Use a hig-
ent temperature too high; 2. Load too high her-powered device
2
(power stage or braking chopper)
9 E-PLS 1 Plausibility check detected invalid parameter (1) RESET

6
or impermissible program sequence
Unknown switching frequency on initializa- (1)
3
tion of power stage protection
8 Unable to initialize parameter list in device Reset device via: 1. Set parameter
startup phase. KP200 may display number of PROG=1. 2. Switch off device, hold
faulty parameter at top left. down KP200 Up and Down key and
4
switch device back on. KP200 indi-
cates "RESET"
9 Plausibility check detected invalid parameter (1)
object (incorrect data type or incorrect data
5
length)
10 No readable parameter exists at the current (1)
user level or parameter access error via
KP200
6
13 Both slots assigned the same module Remove a module.
20 Error in auto-tuning 1. Check match of motor rating plate
data with corresponding motor para- 7
meters and restart auto-tuning. (1)
101 Unknown switching frequency in initialization (1)
of PWM
(1) Please contact Your service provider if this error occurs again. A
Table A.2 Error messages of the CDA3000

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-15
Appendix B Error messages

Error
Bus DM/KP Cause Remedy Response
location
10 E-PAR 0 Invalid parameter setting Correct parameter setting or reset RESET
device to factory setting
2 Parameter FMINx greater than parameter Set FMINx < FMAXx
FMAXx or error in initialization of current-
controlled startup
7 The value of a parameter after the device Parameter 423-ERPAR contains the
startup phase is outside its value range. number of the faulty parameter
whose setting needs to be checked.
8 Error in first initialization of parameter list. A Parameter 423-ERPAR contains the
parameter could not be set to factory setting number of the faulty parameter
whose setting needs to be checked.
13 The combination of the settings of the Check and change setting
function selector for one of the analog inputs
and the reference selector conflict
16 The setting of parameter FOSA0 (function Check and change setting
selector output OSA0) is outside its value
range
100 Error in controller initialization Check setting of controller and motor
parameters. Restart auto-tuning as
necessary.
101 Error in initialization of PWM (1)
102 Error in encoder evaluation (1)
104 Error in initialization of voltage frequency (1)
control
105 Error in initialization of actual value recording (1)
106 Two interpolation points of the V/F characte- Change setting
ristic have the same frequency
107 Slope between two interpolation points for Change setting
the V/F characteristic is too large
108 Error in initialization of SFC due to inappro- Check controller and motor settings
priate motor and controller parameter setting and restart auto-tuning as neces-
sary.
11 E-FLT 0 General error in floating point calculation (1) RESET
12 E-PWR 6 Power pack not correctly identified 1. Return device (1) RESET
13 E-EXT 1 Error in an external device Rectify error in external device HALT
14 E-USR 0 reserved for error messages of customer
specific software
(1) Please contact Your service provider if this error occurs again.

Table A.2 Error messages of the CDA3000

Application Manual CDA3000 A-16


Appendix B Error messages

Error
Bus DM/KP Cause Remedy Response
location
15 E-OP1 150 Error in module at option slot 1 1. Check module and identifier\n 2. HALT
1
(1)
151 Error on option 1: BUS-OFF state detected Check module contacting. If the error
still occurs after switching off/on the
device or module is defective.
2
152 Error on option 1: Unable to send transmit Check module contacting. If the error
protocol. still occurs after switching off/on the

153 Error on option 1: Module no longer respon-


device or module is defective.
Check module contacting. If the error
3
ding still occurs after switching off/on the
device or module is defective.
154 Error on option 1: Module signals error Check module contacting. If the error
still occurs after switching off/on the
4
device or module is defective.
16 E-OP2 170 Error in module at option slot 2 1. Check module and identifier 2. (1) HALT
171 Error on option 2: BUS-OFF state detected Check module contacting. If the error 5
still occurs after switching off/on the
device or module is defective.
172 Error on option 2: Unable to send transmit Check module contacting. If the error
protocol. still occurs after switching off/on the 6
device or module is defective.
173 Error on option 2: Module no longer respon- Check module contacting. If the error
ding still occurs after switching off/on the
device or module is defective. 7
174 Error on option 2: Module signals error Check module contacting. If the error
still occurs after switching off/on the
device or module is defective.
18 E-SIO 11 Watchdog for monitoring communication 1. Check connection; 2. Check bus HALT A
over LustBus tripped master or increase parameter
SWDGT
19 E-EEP 3 Error accessing parameter memory 1. switch device off/on; 2. (1) RESET
20 E-WBK 1 Possible wire break at input ISA01. Current Check wiring of input ISA01 HALT
less than 4mA in parameter setting to 4-
20mA
(1) Please contact Your service provider if this error occurs again.

Table A.2 Error messages of the CDA3000

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-17
Appendix B Error messages

Error
Bus DM/KP Cause Remedy Response
location
21 E-SC 20 Error in auto-tuning 1. Check motor wiring and repeat LOCK
procedure. 2. (1)
21 Error in auto-tuning. Motor not connected or 1. Check motor wiring and repeat
not properly connected procedure. 2. (1)
22 Auto-tuning is only suitable for asynchronous Set parameter 153-CFMOT to ASM if
machines. an appropriate motor is used, and
repeat auto-tuning.
23 Auto-tuning is unable to identify the connec- 1. Get motor parameters from manu-
ted motor correctly. facturer and enter manually 2. If pos-
sible use a different motor
22 E-PF 1 Error in power failure bridging: DC-link 1. Check mains power supply HALT
voltage not restored within the time parame-
ter (343-PFTIM).
23 E-RNM 0 Error in activation of an application data set 1. The error location number details RESET
the faulty parameter. 2. (1)
24 E-FDG 1 Transmissions error in reference coupling 1. Check connection HALT
25 E-LSW 1 Limit switches confused 1. Correct installation LOCK
(1) Please contact Your service provider if this error occurs again.

Table A.2 Error messages of the CDA3000

Application Manual CDA3000 A-18


Appendix C Index
1

A D
2
Acceleration ramp ............................... 5-76 Dangers ........................................... 1-1
Actual values ..................................... 5-56 Data structure ..................................... 3-2
ADS (Application data set) ........................ 3-2 DC braking ....................................... 5-87 3
Analog speed input .............................. 4-30 DC holding ....................................... 5-90
Anti-stall protection .............................. 5-93 Deceleration ramp ............................... 5-76
Application data set Device capacity utilization ....................... 5-54
Activating ..................................... 4-2 Device data ....................................... 5-55 4
Adapting ..................................... 3-13 Device protection ................................ 5-45
Setting ........................................ 5-5 Device reset ...................................... 2-14
Application data set (ADS) ........................ 3-4 DriveManager .................................... 3-12
Assistance parameter Driving profile generator ................. 5-26, 5-74 5
ASCA .......................................... 6-9 Driving sets .............................. 5-26, 5-79
Auto-tuning Dynamic, maximum ............................. 5-93
Activation ..................................... 5-7
6
E
B EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) ............ 1-1
Back-up device setup ............................. 5-5 Error
Bar graph, KP200 ................................ 5-51 Reset ................................. 5-62, B-13 7
Bootstrap ......................................... 2-16 Error ATT1 ......................................... 3-7
Error messages .......................... 2-11, 5-62
C A
CDS (Characteristic data set) ..................... 3-5 F
Characteristic data set (CDS) ..................... 3-6 Factory defaults, restoring ....................... 2-15
Characteristic data switchover .................. 5-82 Factory setting ................................... 2-14
Characteristic, 87 Hz ............................ 6-10 Factory setting, Definition ........................ 5-2
Clock drive ....................................... 4-17 Field bus operation .............................. 4-37
Closed-loop control modes ....................... 5-9 Active functions ............................. 4-38
Commissioning ................................... 3-13 Applications .................................. 4-5
Continuous actual value display, KP200 ........ 5-51 Parameter comparison ...................... 4-44
Control location .................................. 5-34 Field-Oriented Regulation (FOR) ................. 6-38
Control terminals, Specification .................. 2-6 Fixed frequencies ................................ 5-78
Control word of system .......................... 5-57 Frequency limits ................................. 5-37
Current controller ................................ 5-91
Current injection ................................. 6-16
Current overload protection ..................... 5-93
Current-controlled startup ....................... 5-93
DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-19
Appendix C Index

I N
Increase standstill torque ....................... 6-18 No., Definition ..................................... 5-3
Increase starting torque ......................... 6-18 Nominal speed ..................................... 5-4
Initial commissioning .............................. 5-4
Inputs
analog ....................................... 5-10
O
digital ........................................ 5-17 Online, Definition .................................. 5-2
Specification .................................. 2-6 Open-loop control modes ......................... 5-9
Using analog inputs as digital inputs ...... 2-12 Option slots 1 and 2 ............................. 5-36
Intended use ....................................... 1-2 Output, analog ................................... 5-14
Isolation concept ................................ 2-12 Outputs
IxR load compensation .......................... 6-12 digital ........................................ 5-21
Ixt monitoring .................................... 5-40 Specification .................................. 2-8

K P
KeyPad KP200 ..................................... 3-9 Parameter comparison
Field bus operation ......................... 4-44
Master/Slave operation ..................... 4-58
L Rotational drive ............................. 4-35
LEDs ............................................. 2-11 Traction and lifting drive ................... 4-23
Limit frequency .................................. 6-16 Parameter reset ................................. 2-14
Limit switch evaluation, example ............... 4-16 Password .......................................... 3-8
Load surges ...................................... 6-12 Power failure bridging ........................... 5-47
Preset
Parameter ..................................... 5-4
M Preset, activate .................................... 4-2
Magnetizing current ............................. 6-18 Preset, select ...................................... 4-3
Mass moment of inertia PTC evaluation ................................... 5-39
Of motor ....................................... 5-5
Of system ..................................... 5-7
Setting ......................................... 5-6 Q
Master drive ..................................... 4-50 Qualification, users ................................ 1-1
Master/Slave operation ......................... 4-46 Quick jog/slow jog driving profile ................. 4-9
Active functions ............................. 4-49
Applications ................................... 4-6
Overview .................................... 4-46
Parameter comparison ..................... 4-58
Parameters .................................. 5-84
Menu structure of KP200, Overview ............ 3-10
Modulation ....................................... 5-98
MOP function .................................... 5-71
Motor holding brake ............................. 5-69
Motor protection ................................. 5-39
Motor PTC, specification .......................... 2-8
Motor rated power ................................. 5-4

Application Manual CDA3000 A-20


Appendix C Index

R U
Ramp generator .......................... 5-75, 5-76 UDS (user data set) ............................... 3-2
Reference channels .............................. 5-26 UDS, Switchover .................................. 5-8 1
Reference selectors .............................. 5-30 UDS, User data set ................................ 3-5
Reference structure .............................. 5-26 User data set
Relay output ....................................... 2-8 Setting ........................................ 5-8
Reloading device software ...................... 2-16 User level .......................................... 3-7 2
Remagnetization ................................. 6-18 User/communication module ..................... 2-4
Reset ............................................. 2-14
Response to error ................................ 5-64
Reverse via terminal ............................. 5-20
V 3
Rotational drive Voltage Frequency Control (VFC) ................. 6-4
Active functions ............................. 4-26 Voltage frequency control with two interpolation points
Applications .................................. 4-4 6-7
Parameter comparison ...................... 4-35 Voltage supply, Specification ..................... 2-8 4

S W
Sampling time ..................................... 2-9 Warning messages .............................. 5-59 5
Sensorless Flux Control (SFC) ................... 6-20
Serial interface, as control location ............. 5-36
Set reference input .............................. 5-32
Setting, Definition ................................. 5-3
6
Sinusoidal ramps ................................ 5-76
Slave drive ....................................... 4-54
Slip ............................................... 6-14
Slip compensation ............................... 6-14
7
Starting torque ................................... 6-16
Status word of system ........................... 5-57
Stop ramp ........................................ 5-76 A
Subject areas, Overview .......................... 3-3
Switching frequency ............................. 5-98

T
Temperature sensors, types ..................... 5-40
Terminal view ..................................... 2-2
Terminals, as control location ................... 5-35
Traction and lifting drive
Active functions .............................. 4-7
Applications .................................. 4-3
Parameter comparison ...................... 4-23

DE
EN
Application Manual CDA3000 A-21
Appendix C Index

Application Manual CDA3000 A-22


Lust Antriebstechnik GmbH
Gewerbestrasse 5-9 • D-35631 Lahnau • Germany
Tel. +49 (0) 64 41 / 9 66-0 • Fax +49 (0) 64 41 / 9 66-137
Internet: http://www.lust-tec.com • e-mail: lust@lust-tec.de

ID no.: 0840.22B.0-00 • Date: 01/2000


We reserve the right to make technical changes.

You might also like